GCB's WWE

[GCB]

MONDAY NIGHT RAW
RUPP ARENA, LEXINGTON, KENTUCKY
MONDAY JANUARY 31ST, 2011

*** PREVIEW ***

*** JOHN CENA HAS PROPOSITION FOR RANDY ORTON ***
2011 Royal Rumble winner John Cena may well be ready to set his sights on his World Heavyweight Championship match at WrestleMania 27; however, he is set to appear tonight on RAW to address his rivalry with RAW superstar, Randy Orton. The pair of them have been at loggerheads for the past couple of months since Cena ‘lost’ Orton’s WWE Championship to Wade Barrett and the Nexus at the Survivor Series and with Cena now occupying a spot on SMACKDOWN, an appearance on RAW tonight must mean that he has a big announcement. After Cena’s music played during Orton’s match last week with The Miz – a match where Orton could have qualified for a chance at Barrett’s title at the Elimination Chamber – he announced that he had a ‘proposition’ for the Viper, a statement that has the whole of the WWE Universe wondering about what it could be. Fireworks are expected after their problems at the Royal Rumble but just what will Cena have to say to his RAW adversary as he seeks to move on from their problems?

*** NUMBER 1 CONTENDER FOR WWE CHAMPIONSHIP TO BE DECIDED ***
Wade Barrett’s title reign may have been controversial but the Englishman is heading towards WrestleMania with just one major hurdle left in his path as he seeks to defend his gold at the biggest event of the year. However, tonight, we will see four men do battle in a Fatal Four Way match to determine who will challenge for Barrett’s title in just under three weeks at the Elimination Chamber. First up is the impressive Miz, the man who still holds the Money in the Bank contract and a man who is on a major roll right now after some huge wins. Or will it be Daniel Bryan? This is Bryan’s first foray into the major leagues of the WWE and he will be looking to bounce back from losing the US Championship a few weeks back by heading to the PPV with a chance to capture the top prize on RAW. Olympic gold medal winner, Kurt Angle, will also be involved in the match. With his recent change of attitude, as well as the presence of two mystery men last week, Angle cannot be counted out tonight. Finally, John Morrison makes up the match as he looks for his big break. Like Bryan, Morrison is looking to springboard up the ladder here on RAW and earn himself a WWE Championship match for the first time. Which man will prevail?

*** ELIMINATION CHAMBER QUALIFIERS ***
General Manager of RAW, Shawn Michaels, has announced that the three men who lose in the Number 1 contender match will fill three of the spaces in the RAW Elimination Chamber match, a match that will determine which RAW superstar challenges for the WWE Championship at WrestleMania. Tonight, there will be three qualifying matches: Sheamus vs. RVD, Chris Jericho vs. Edge and an opportunity for Triple H although this has yet to be announced. HBK will be hoping to have his two RAW main events for the Chamber PPV determined tonight, who will have WrestleMania 27 in their sights at the end of the night?

*** CHAMPION vs. CHAMPION ***
HBK has also announced that the WWE Champion Wade Barrett will be in action tonight as he goes up against US Champion and former Nexus team-mate, Justin Gabriel. The interesting dynamic between these two comes in the form of the WWE Championship gold over the shoulder of Barrett – it was actually won for him by the South African, Gabriel, back at Survivor Series. With a US Championship defence with Ted DiBiase on the horizon, Gabriel will now look to pull off an upset win that could also elevate his stock into potential WWE Championship contention in the future. Will Gabriel be able to force Barrett to feel the pain of his awesome finishing move? Or will Barrett prove that he was the true leader of the Nexus and the rightful WWE Champion?

*** OTHER PREVIEWS ***
Carlito will be on RAW as he continues to look to determine his allegiance – will he sign with RAW or SMACKDOWN? After failing to even appear on SMACKDOWN last week, surely the fact he has another match on RAW tonight, potentially against the future US Champion in Ted DiBiase, means he will decide to join the red brand? WWE owner Chip Butty has let it be known that he will be in Lexington tonight, he tweeted earlier today “In Lexington for #RAW later tonight, interested to see what @johncena has to say #noviolence” as he looks to ensure order on his show.

*** JOIN US TONIGHT FOR MONDAY NIGHT RAW – LIVE! ***

*** CONFIRMED ***

#1 CONTENDER MATCH (WWE CHAMPIONSHIP)
Daniel Bryan vs. John Morrison vs. Kurt Angle vs. The Miz

ELIMINATION CHAMBER QUALIFIERS
Chris Jericho vs. Edge
RVD vs. Sheamus
Triple H to be in action as well

CHAMPION vs. CHAMPION
US Champion Justin Gabriel vs. WWE Champion Wade Barrett

Carlito vs. Ted DiBiase​

 

[GCB]

TCoP and JAM - Response to feedback:

Thanks for the feedback, I wanted to answer some of your questions/comments and decided to do it via the thread. It's important that you're clear about these things as WM heads around. I could have done a news thing but you'd know what I was up to. As always, remember that I know what WM looks like. Trust me on some things. I can't spoil things but you obviously don't have the full picture. Yet.

Ryder and Hawkins - established team? I don't think they were. They've only had a two month run as champions. Ryder is too well known as a face now IRL, I can't write him heel. I needed to get him away. Also, I reckon my midcard is a little lacking now I've made stars of the likes of Kofi, Christian and others, Ryder could easily fit into that post WrestleMania. The little feud between Ryder and Hawkins should get them split and allow the Tag Teams I want to focus on to shine. The division is going to be built slowly until it gets back some prestige. Swagger's interruption was random, I haven't even decided why myself yet, however, you can see he's going to join with Hawkins. Now, Swagger and Hawkins is a heel team for sure. I did think about having Swagger involved with Kurt Angle but felt his World CHampionship reign spoilt this idea. I've got nothing for Swagger though, he doesn't fit into my show (he should be on NXT in hindsight) so I need to give him a role. Tag Team for now is where he is at until I get chance to do something with him.

Michael Cole - a temporary GM, JAM? I don't think so. Cole as GM is gold, I'm loving writing him. Expect him to stay on in that role, he isn't going back to the desk anytime soon!

Buried Alive on SMACKDOWN: I understand the idea that it is too big but the feud between Taker and Kane needs to happen now and the PPV's were not right for it to happen. I told you all a while back - they won't face each other on PPV and I meant it. They had to be in the Rumble and one of them is going into the Chamber for a reason - maybe to win, maybe to set something up. I needed their feud, which has been burning in the background since I started the BT, to end before EC and now it will do. Buried Alive will be the end of it.

I don't get the idea that people seem weak because they lose one match? Empire are TT Champions, why do they need to win every match? The win for the Hardys was needed, Empire don't look weak for losing to, IMO, the best Tag Team in history. Same for Kofi winning with help from Mysterio. Just because ADR was setting for a Cross Arm Breaker doesn't mean he would have won without Rey. The story of that match was not about Kofi going to EC (you knew he would be, admit it), the story there was Rey and Alberto. Kofi is built, his star is now shining and when the time comes I will pull the trigger on him - but will he win at the EC?

Punk - glad you're liking the tweener thing. With the winner of the EC facing Cena at the WM event, the guys in the Chamber need to be mainly faces. I'm bringing out Punk's face side but who knows whether he is keeping it? That's the thing with Punk, I like it when he switches it around, it's better than CM Punk the face or CM Punk the heel. You can see him facing Cena at WM, you can also see him screwing Christian down the line - can't you? That's my aim.

McGillicutty and Watson, Angle's mystery men - you're making me laugh with the disappointed thing with this. Who were you expecting? They're mystery men but they're not going to be Goldberg and Lesnar are they? Two young guys, like Haas and Benjamin were, who will join with Angle - I like these two guys and think I can make them work as a Tag Team and as Angle's team. Don't let their NXT thing blind you here, I will develop them, the aim is for them to become like Team Angle. RAW will show you more ...

Keep reading!

GCB

 

[GCB]

MONDAY NIGHT RAW LIVE
RUPP ARENA, LOUISVILLE, KENTUCKY
MONDAY JANUARY 31ST, 2011

*** BURN IT TO THE GROUND ***

*** PYRO ***
*** PYRO ***
*** PYRO ***
*** PYRO ***
*** PYRO ***

As the pyro explodes around the arena, the WWE Universe here in Lexington are going wild with signs held up showing support for superstars such as Triple H, Randy Orton and Justin Gabriel. JR and King are on commentary and they build up the hype for tonight’s show where we expect to see a Number 1 contender for Wade Barrett’s WWE Championship decided as well as John Cena’s proposition for Randy Orton as well ...

*** WE ARE ONE ***

*** WADE BARRETT ***
WWE Champion​

Sauntering out with the WWE Championship around his waist, Wade Barrett heads out towards the ring without his Nexus team-mates for a change. He stands looking around the arena at the bottom of the ramp before he walks around the outside and takes a seat at the side of the announce table as JR introduces him as being a guest announcer for the next match.

JIM ROSS:
Ladies and Gentlemen, the WWE Champion, Wade Barrett. Welcome, Mr. Barrett, thanks for joining us here for this match tonight.

WADE BARRETT:
You’re welcome, JR, always good to come out here and check out future opponents – not that I’ll need any help with beating any of these four, of course.

JERRY LAWLER:
No Nexus with you tonight, Wade?

Barrett casts an annoyed look towards the King but he refrains from answering as attention turns towards the ring announcer ...

JUSTIN ROBERTS:
Ladies and Gentlemen, this match is set for one fall. The winner of the match will challenge for Wade Barrett’s WWE Championship at the Elimination Chamber PPV in three weeks.

*** RIDE OF THE VALKYRIES ***

*** DANIEL BRYAN ***​

The former US Champion Daniel Bryan heads out with a smile on his face, he looks ready for his big opportunity here tonight as he sidesteps his way down the ramp towards the ring ...

WADE BARRETT:
If this is the standard of challengers for my WWE Championship, my reign as champion is definitely going to be a long one, gents.

JERRY LAWLER:
Daniel Bryan, former US Champion, he’s been on a roll since his arrival here in the WWE last summer. Didn’t he join the WWE with you in NXT?

WADE BARRETT:
Yeah, he did. I kicked him out of Nexus too. Remember?

Bryan steps between the ropes and he jumps up onto the middle rope to salute the fans in the arena, he raises his finger in the air as the crowd give him a good pop. He jumps off the ropes and then he approaches the ropes where he looks over towards the smirking Wade Barrett as he holds the WWE Championship across his lap.

*** MEDAL ***

*** KURT ANGLE ***​

Attention turns towards the ramp as the Olympic Hero Kurt Angle heads out – alone – and he stands at the top of the ramp and points towards the ceiling. An explosion of red, white and blue fireworks accompany Angle as he strides down the ramp looking pumped up and determined to get a victory tonight. There is no sign of the two mystery men who came to the ring last week and assisted Angle’s win over Triple H, he’s here on his own.

JIM ROSS:
1996 Olympic gold medal winner, 2000 King of the Ring, a six time World Champion and a Grand Slam champion, a sure fire Hall of Famer. Surely this man is worth an opportunity at the WWE Championship?

WADE BARRETT:
All very impressive, JR, there’s no doubt that Kurt Angle has done it all here in the WWE. The fact is, though, he is too old, past it, he’s not on my level no more. If he wins this match, I’ll have no problem showing him that the only red, white and blue that counts is that of Her Majesty, the Queen.

Angle is in the ring and he looks towards Daniel Bryan and then Wade Barrett with a smile on his face, it appears that he is extremely confident in his abilities tonight ...

*** AIN’T NO MAKE BELIEVE ***

*** JOHN MORRISON ***​

The slo-mo entrance of Morrison plays out and he heads out with a multi-coloured pyro behind him before he raises his arm in the air. He heads towards the ring with his long coat fluttering behind him and then he swings into the ring and salutes the fans again ...

WADE BARRETT:
Another man who is completely undeserving of this opportunity, JR, King. What has he done in the WWE to deserve a chance to challenge me for the WWE Championship? Nothing. John Morrison is an habitual loser, he wins matches against nobodies but when he comes up against somebody with a little bit of talent, he loses.

JERRY LAWLER:
Give it a rest, Barrett. Quite a few people would argue that you were undeserving of the WWE Championship when you won it ...

*** AWESOME – I CAME TO PLAY ***

*** THE MIZ ***
Current holder of the ‘Money in the Bank’ contract ​

Arrogant and cocky, here comes Miz. He raises his hands in the air and then heads for the ring with his overcoat flowing behind him, he looks determined to win the match tonight. There is a noticeable absentee for Miz as well – his Money in the Bank briefcase. With his big opportunity tonight, Miz appears to be focused on this match and not on what might happen in the future.

JIM ROSS:
Whilst many people might despise him, there is no argument that Miz is on a roll right now. He has several big wins under his belt right now, he seems destined to be the WWE Champion ...

WADE BARRETT:
Destined to be WWE Champion? I don’t think so, JR. I am the WWE Champion, there is nobody here that can beat me, not Bryan, not Angle, not Morrison and definitely not Miz. Never going to happen.

Miz is in the ring and mouthing off to the other men in the match – particularly his old rivals, Morrison and Bryan – before he perches on the ropes and signals that he is one of the greats in the WWE. The referee clears the ring of all extra bits before he signals for the bell, here we go, time to determine the Number 1 contender.

FATAL FOUR WAY MATCH – WINNER FACES WADE BARRETT FOR WWE CHAMPIONSHIP AT ELIMINATION CHAMBER
DANIEL BRYAN vs. JOHN MORRISON vs. KURT ANGLE vs. THE MIZ

A hard hitting, fast paced match as all four men go at it with a clear desire to become the Number 1 contender and to head to the Elimination Chamber to face Wade Barrett for the WWE Championship. After the initial flurry of activity in the match, the four men split into two pairs as Angle and Bryan lock up inside the ring whilst Morrison and Miz lock up outside the ring. Morrison and Miz’ personal issues overflow as they battle on the outside and the barricades and ring steps come into play as both men feel the pain of them on their backs. Inside the ring, Angle and Bryan – as fits their style – are more focused on wrestling and they roll around the mat trying to lock in submission holds, particularly the Ankle Lock for Kurt and the Le Bell Lock for Bryan. At one point, Angle manages to lock Bryan into the Ankle Lock and Bryan is struggling to get to the ropes. Realising that this could lead to a defeat, Miz, who has Morrison down on the outside, runs in and kicks Angle hard in the exposed side and this allows him to break the hold before Bryan can tap out.

Morrison manages to get back into the ring and we have periods of time for all four men to take charge of the match. Near falls become more and more frequent as all four men look to keep one of the other three down but there is always some other guy to break the pinfall before we can see if there was going to be a kick out. Bryan manages to lock Miz in the Le Bell Lock with Morrison and Angle down but Miz makes it to the ropes – a few months ago, he’d have tapped out like he did on the night where he lost the US Championship to Bryan at Night of Champions. The crowd are split between Bryan and Morrison as the match snakes and heads towards a conclusion but it appears over when Bryan sails off the top rope and connects with a Diving Headbutt to Angle. He hooks the leg, neither Miz or Morrison is going to make it, 1 ... 2 ... Almost! Angle kicks out at the last second and Bryan holds his head in despair, he was so close to earning a WWE Championship shot just there.

WADE BARRETT:
So close there for Daniel Bryan, I’d have liked to have seen him get the win there. It would be as if I’d been given the night off for the Elimination Chamber ...

Arrogant attitude from Barrett on the outside but inside the ring, Bryan continues to go for it. He spots Miz coming in and he quickly climbs the ropes ... Missile Dropkick from Bryan to Miz! The crowd are cheering, they are liking the idea that Daniel Bryan could get the win here and challenge for the WWE Championship in just under three weeks. Morrison comes through the ropes and Bryan hits a knee to the side of his head that collapses him, the match is looking like Bryan’s to lose. Daniel takes Morrison down to the mat face first and locks in the Le Bell Lock once again! LE BELL LOCK TO JOHN MORRISON! WILL HE TAP? Bryan is screaming as he desperately tries to force a tap out from Morrison, pulling back as hard as he can, forcing Morrison closer and closer to tapping. Morrison is trying to edge back towards the ropes but Bryan has this locked in right in the centre of the ring here, how is he going to escape this? As Morrison seems to slump and the hope leaves him, he is about to tap out ... when suddenly here comes Miz! Miz rushes over, realising that if Morrison taps, his WWE Championship hopes also go up in smoke, he kicks Bryan hard in the head and this breaks the Le Bell Lock just in time. Morrison, the pain eased, rolls out of the ring, clutching his neck and shoulders, as Miz starts blasting Bryan hard with kicks to the back and shoulders.

WADE BARRETT:
Look at Morrison, weak. He’s showing a weakness, I would never have even got into the position with Bryan there ...

JERRY LAWLER:
Of course you wouldn’t, you’d have got your buddies to drag Bryan out of the ring before he could lock it on!

Barrett looks less than impressed with Lawler’s comments as the camera flicks to him for a moment but then the camera returns to Miz in the ring. The ‘awesome’ one edges back, he allows Bryan to pull himself up as he holds his hands out wide, he is waiting to strike ... SKULL CRUSHING FINALE! MIZ STRIKES WITH THE SKULL CRUSHING FINALE TO BRYAN! Miz rolls Bryan over, he hooks the leg ... 1 ... 2 ... Angle breaks the pin! Just in the nick of time, Kurt Angle rolls into the ring and he crashes into the back of Miz. As the pair of them are on their knees over Bryan, Angle and Miz fire right hands at each other over and over and then they roll under the bottom rope as they trade hands trying to get the upper hand. Angle is the one who gets the better of it and he grabs Miz with the back of the neck and rams him hard into the steel ring posts, they crash apart as Miz hits them so hard. Confident now, Angle heads back into the ring and stands over Bryan who is struggling to his feet. Angle prepares for him and is crouching behind him, on his haunches, waiting for a chance ... He beckons to Bryan to turn round, he is waiting and waiting ... ANGLE SLAM! KURT ANGLE HITS THE ANGLE SLAM! It’s over! Angle is about to hook the leg of Daniel Bryan when all of a sudden ...

*** TIME TO PLAY THE GAME ***

*** TRIPLE H ***​

Huge pop from the crowd as Triple H storms out towards the ring looking for revenge on Angle. The Olympian is in no doubt about who the Game is coming for and he stands up ready to defend himself. As Hunter stands at the bottom of the ramp and looks up into the eyes of Angle ready to spoil his chances of winning something, there is another commotion behind – here come Angle’s mystery men that we first saw last night! Both of them barrel into the back of Triple H and crash him down from behind, Hunter though manages to start fighting back and they end up fighting back up the ramp towards the entrance way. Angle applauds his men before turning his attention back to Daniel Bryan who is down and out ... He goes to make the cover ... 1 ... 2 ... No! Morrison drags Angle away by the legs, Angle is surprised and he spins round ... CHUCK KICK! MORRISON WITH THE SURPRISE CHUCK KICK! Angle staggers around, he is dazed ... Morrison rolls him up ...

** 1 **
** 2 **
** 3 **​

WINNER:
JOHN MORRISON (11:38) via pinfall

An explosion of noise from the WWE Universe as Angle leaps up in surprise, he can’t believe that Morrison just caught him out there. As Angle stands there stunned, he turns to look up the ramp where Triple H has overcome Angle’s mystery men and is stood looking down at him with a grin on his face. “Payback is a bitch” calls out Hunter before he turns to leave and Angle rolls out of the ring to confront the referee who refuses to change his decision. Back in the ring, John Morrison is knelt down in the corner, breathing hard, a huge smile spreading across his face as he realises what he has done. He jumps onto the middle rope in the corner and salutes the fans once more before turning his head to face the WWE Champion on commentary ...

JIM ROSS:
At Elimination Chamber, it will be John Morrison challenging you for the WWE Championship, Mr. Barrett ...

WADE BARRETT:
Lucky win, JR, I don’t see any problems for me when I face him in three weeks.

JERRY LAWLER:
Is that because you know of four guys who won’t let you lose the match?

Barrett turns to smirk at Lawler and then he stands up to face Morrison who is signalling to Barrett’s WWE Championship belt ...

WADE BARRETT:
You need to keep out of my way, Morrison, stay up there. You are not going to win this ...

Barrett removes his title belt and he holds it up high for Morrison to admire as RAW head into the first commercial break of the evening ...

*** COMMERCIAL BREAK ***​

 

[GCB]

*** COMMERCIAL BREAK ***​

RAW returns with replays of the exciting finish to the first match of the evening – Triple H’s distraction to deny Kurt Angle and then the surprise roll up from John Morrison that means, as JR enjoys informing us, that at the Elimination Chamber PPV in three weeks, it will be Wade Barrett against John Morrison for the WWE Championship. The cameras switch backstage where we see Kurt Angle stomping around and shoving things over, a look of fury all over his face, he heads back into the depths of the arena looking for somebody ... The cameras switch to Triple H who is also looking determined as he walks down a corridor before turning through a door marked ‘RAW General Manager’ where we see Shawn Michaels sat down. HBK gets up as Hunter walks in and glances to the side but Hunter wants a word with him ...

TRIPLE H:
Shawn, you know what I’m here for ...

SHAWN MICHAELS:
Hunter, wait, let me ...

TRIPLE H:
No, Shawn, listen to me. Last week, that pompous ass Angle blew my chance of getting another shot at Barrett and I want you to sort it. He brought those two morons out to the ring, I don’t know who they are or why they’re here but you got to sort this for me ...

SHAWN MICHAELS:
Hunter, you know, I think you should ...

TRIPLE H:
Shawn, you’re my buddy, sort this for me. Make the match at Elimination Chamber a Triple Threat – Barrett against Morrison and me. I need another shot at Barrett.

SHAWN MICHAELS:
Hunter, I ...

Off camera, there is an interruption as somebody coughs to get Triple H’s attention. The camera follows Triple H as he spins around and sat on another couch out of view is the owner of the WWE, Chip Butty. Hunter looks back at Michaels ...

SHAWN MICHAELS:
I was trying to tell you, man, the boss is here tonight.

Butty stands up and walks over to Triple H and Shawn Michaels as they stand together in the middle of the room. He is smirking as he approaches them and shaking his head slightly ...

CHIP BUTTY:
Is that how it works here then? Triple H comes in and demands something, his good friend and RAW General Manager thinks of a way to make it happen?

HBK looks annoyed at the claim from his boss and shakes his head in denial ...

CHIP BUTTY:
Unfortunately for you, Triple H, I’m here tonight to keep an eye on the General Manager and I can tell you right now – you will NOT be involved in the Elimination Chamber WWE Championship match. You lost your match last week, Morrison won tonight, he will challenge for the title.

TRIPLE H:
Did you see what ...

CHIP BUTTY:
Excuse me, are you interrupting me, Hunter? Let’s get this straight, I’m in charge around here. I’m not a boss whose daughter you can marry so that you can get a leg up in the business.

An audible ‘Oooh’ is heard in the arena as Triple H backs down a little, Butty has made a bit of a point to him there. Hunter looks annoyed by the jibe but he also realises that he needs to back off here ...

CHIP BUTTY:
For your information, I did see your match with Kurt Angle last week and I did see your match with Wade Barrett at the Rumble. I know you’re not happy with the way that you lost those matches, neither am I, but you have to realise that sometimes life in the WWE isn’t fair. For example, I thought it was an interesting that you were even named the Number 1 contender in the first place ...

Butty looks to HBK who again looks annoyed that his boss is questioning the decisions that he has made.

CHIP BUTTY:
Now, correct me if I’m wrong, Shawn, I believe that after the first match of tonight, John Morrison will be challenging for the WWE Championship at the Chamber? And the three losers – Daniel Bryan, Miz and Kurt Angle – will take three of the six spots in the RAW Elimination Chamber match?

HBK nods his head and he opens his mouth to respond but again he is interrupted ...

CHIP BUTTY:
That means there are three spots left in the Chamber then. Sheamus is facing RVD tonight in a Qualifying match?

HBK again nods his head, he seems to have realised that he needs to just allow his boss to continue ...

CHIP BUTTY:
And that match is next up. Also, as we were just discussing, Shawn, before we were interrupted - (Butty looks pointedly towards Hunter) – I’ve decided that Chris Jericho will face Edge in another Elimination Chamber qualifier.

HBK looks on in reluctant agreement as Butty announces the involvement of the Rated R Superstar in the Qualifying for the Chamber match. Butty nods his head and then turns back to Hunter ...

CHIP BUTTY:
That leaves one space in the Elimination Chamber remaining, Hunter, one more space in the match to determine the challenger for the WWE Championship at WrestleMania. You fancy that spot?

Hunter looks quizzically at the boss and decides that he can now suggest something himself ...

TRIPLE H:
I would love a chance to earn that spot in the Chamber match. If the match is fair, if my opponent, whoever he is, doesn’t bring his friends from the locker room down, I’ll face anybody and anyone.

Butty smiles and looks as if he has a plan ...

CHIP BUTTY:
In that case, Hunter, you’ve got a match tonight. And I guarantee, you’ll not have to worry about Angle’s mystery men or facing the whole of Nexus at once. Tonight, Hunter, you will have an Elimination Chamber qualifier in the main event ...

Hunter looks towards Butty with a nod of his head, he still looks a little untrusting though ...

CHIP BUTTY:
... and it will be a Gauntlet Match, Hunter. If you can defeat four men, one after the other, then you will qualify for the Chamber. (Huge heat from the crowd, Hunter looks really annoyed) And your opponents will be – David Otunga, Heath Slater, Skip Sheffield and Ezekiel Jackson. Good luck, man!

As Hunter looks on speechless with rage, Butty pats him on the shoulder and then claps HBK on the back ...

CHIP BUTTY:
As for yourself, Shawn, don’t you have something to do? As I’ve told you already, this is MY office this evening, I am running things. Why don’t you get out there, find Orton and give him my message?

Arrogantly, Butty waves both Triple H and Shawn Michaels out of the office as he sits back down on the couch with a huge grin on his face.

CHIP BUTTY:
I love being in charge!

As Butty’s grinning face fades away and the camera switches back to the ring, more boos can be clearly heard, Butty’s recent actions are not winning him any friends with the WWE Universe. With the ring in the picture now, it is time for the first Elimination Chamber qualifier of the evening ...

*** ONE OF A KIND ***

*** ROB VAN DAM ***​

Confident as usual, RVD heads towards the ring pointing his thumbs to himself and claiming that he is heading to WrestleMania as the fans reach out to slap hands with him. Into the ring he goes where he spins around to salute the fans who cheer him. JR and King are discussing how RVD will need to be on top form this evening if he is to put the stop to this man ...

*** WRITTEN IN MY FACE ***

*** SHEAMUS ***
(w/Hornswoggle)​

With Hornswoggle running beside him, Sheamus strides out thumping his pale chest ready for action. A replay is shown of Sheamus’ defeat to Daniel Bryan last week and the beating that he laid down on Bryan afterwards as a result. JR suggests that Sheamus has been on a roll recently and that he would be a real danger if he were to be in the Chamber match. The Celtic Warrior steps up into the ring and points to the steps so that Hornswoggle knows where to wait for him.

SINGLES MATCH
ROB VAN DAM vs. SHEAMUS

RVD comes out of the blocks quickly and he catches the Celtic Warrior by surprise with a barrage of kicks that stagger Sheamus out of his usual rhythm. RVD manages to take Sheamus down several times but he can’t keep him down for long enough before Sheamus catches him with a double axe handle chop and then catches him with the Irish Curse backbreaker that leaves Van Dam squirming on the mat. Sheamus begins to dominate the match now and it is RVD who is trying to make the comebacks; unfortunately for him, he doesn’t have the power of the Celtic Warrior and these comebacks are pretty shortlived. When Sheamus lands several thumps to RVD’s chest whilst he is tied in the ropes, things are looking forlorn for the former ECW hero. A slam to the mat follows and Sheamus backs away to the corner of the ring, he is setting up for the finish now. RVD staggers to his feet and Sheamus runs to him ... BROG ... No! RVD ducks it and Sheamus ends up caught over the top rope instead! RVD surprises Sheamus with a monkey flip as he frees himself from the ropes and then comes off the ropes cartwheeling into a Rolling Thunder splash. RVD gets a 2 count and then he springboards off the ropes to hit a side kick that knocks Sheamus down once more. Sheamus looks furious as he tries to get up again – RVD comes off the ropes and connects with a spinning wheel kick, right on the jaw of Sheamus, his opponent collapses to the mat and RVD senses a chance now. Up to the top rope he goes, RVD is ready to fly ...

Noooooo! Sheamus avoids the contact from the 5-star Frog Splash and RVD eats the mat as he lands awkwardly and with a huge impact. As RVD bounces, Sheamus takes a second to recover whilst his opponent groggily gets to his feet ... BROGUE KICK! SHEAMUS CONNECTS WITH THE BROGUE KICK!

** 1 **
** 2 **
** 3 **​

WINNER:
SHEAMUS (5:17) via pinfall

Sheamus stands central in the ring with a look of delight on his face – he has qualified for the Elimination Chamber match with relative ease here tonight. As RVD rolls away disappointed, Sheamus mocks the crowd and points to himself and then to the WrestleMania 27 sign hanging in the rafters – it is clear that Sheamus believes he is heading to the big event to win the WWE Championship. As the crowd jeer him, Sheamus beckons his mascot, Hornswoggle, into the ring who looks equally excited now. For a change, Hornswoggle didn’t involve himself in the match tonight. JR and King recap the four qualifiers for the Chamber now – Bryan, Angle, Miz and now Sheamus with Edge or Jericho to come as well as, if he can defeat four members of Nexus later, Triple H.

*** COMMERCIAL BREAK ***​

RAW returns with an argument ongoing backstage between two of the Elimination Chamber participants – the recently victorious Sheamus and the man who he handed a beatdown to last week, Daniel Bryan. Bryan is upset with Sheamus’ actions last week and they are straining to get to each other but the WWE security are keeping them apart and moving them away from each other. It is clear that these two still have some issues to be resolved ahead of their Chamber contest in just under three weeks time. The camera switches to the interview pit where Josh Matthews awaits ...

JOSH MATTHEWS:
Ladies and Gentlemen, please welcome my guest at this time – the man who will make a decision over whether he joins RAW or SMACKDOWN at the Elimination Chamber pay-per-view ... CARLITO!

A small pop for the popular Caribbean who comes into view with an apple that he is throwing up and down in his right hand. He is smiling as he comes into the interview area ...

JOSH MATTHEWS:
Last week on RAW, Carlito, you teamed up with RVD last week to defeat Zack Ryder and Curt Hawkins but tonight, you have your first singles match. Your thoughts?

CARLITO:
Ju’ know, last week, I teamed with RVD and dat was cool, man. My first match back here on RAW and I was a winner. I told everybody dat I would wrestle on both RAW and SMACKDOWN and den make a decision about which brand to choose. But do ju’ know what was not cool? (Carlito pauses for a moment before continuing on) Michael Cole, dat is what is not cool. (Big cheers for this comment from Carlito) I am trying to make up my mind about whether to join RAW or SMACKDOWN and he does not wanna’ give me a match? Dat’s seriously uncool, man.

JOSH MATTHEWS:
Carlito, does that mean that you’re going to be deciding to join RAW?

Carlito smiles a little and nods his head, he appears to be answering positively.

CARLITO:
For sure, RAW is in da’ lead right now. Ju’ people here on RAW seem to want Carlito, ju’ wanna see Carlito here. Michael Cole didn’t give me even a match on SMACKDOWN. Here on RAW, tonight, I face Ted DiBiase ... (Carlito pauses for the boos) ... DiBiase may not be cool but he could be the United States Champione in a few weeks time. If I can beat him tonight, ju’ may see that RAW could be my destination and I could get a shot at da’ title.

Carlito bites a chunk out of his apple before crunching it down and looking to the camera with a big smile on his face ...

CARLITO:
Now dat’ ... Dat’ would be cool.

Carlito nods his head to Matthews and leaves with the interviewer thanking him in the background as RAW returns to the ring where it is time for Carlito’s match ...

*** I COME FROM MONEY ***

*** TED DIBIASE ***​

Smirking after he just listened to the comments of his opponent tonight, DiBiase heads out to the ring with the Million Dollar Title draped over his shoulder as JR and King remind us that he could be adding to his gold in the form of the US Championship very soon. JR reminds us that DiBiase defeated Daniel Bryan at the Rumble in a Ladder match and now has the right to face Justin Gabriel for the US Championship at a time of his choosing. King clears up some misunderstanding – he has to give Gabriel notice, it’s not like the Money in the Bank contract, before further discussion goes on about when it could happen. DiBiase poses in the ring as the lights dim and a bright green dollar sign is projected into the ring – reminiscent of the olden days in the WWF when his father, the Million Dollar Man, used to have dollar signs accompanying him to the ring. DiBiase hands the title over to the referee before turning to wait for his opponent ...

*** COOL ***

*** CARLITO ***​

To another mild pop, out comes Carlito looking for his first singles win since his return to the WWE at the Royal Rumble eight days ago. Carlito is still carrying the apple that he took a bite out of before and he salutes the fans as he heads to the ring before grinning at them from the ropes. JR and King suggest that Carlito would be a great addition to the RAW roster and that SMACKDOWN General Manager Michael Cole must be mad to not feature him on the blue brand.

SINGLES MATCH
CARLITO vs. TED DIBIASE

Both men circle each other as the referee signals for the bell before tying up and trying to get the upper hand in the match early. There is nothing between them and, after a few moments, DiBiase changes tack and he shoves Carlito hard in the chest instead so that the Caribbean falls onto his backside instead. Shaking his head, Carlito gets back to his feet and squares up to DiBiase who has words for him over his claims that he will win tonight and insert himself into the US Championship picture down the line. Carlito is never lost for a reply and then DiBiase slaps Carlito hard before taking advantage of the shock caused to take the upper hand. DiBiase then goes on to dominate the early stages and gets a number of close 2 counts as he looks to put Carlito away quickly. However, a problem occurs for the US Championship Number 1 contender when he ducks early to hit a flapjack and Carlito counters with a swinging neckbreaker followed by a springboard moonsault that almost gets him the win.

As the match heads towards its conclusion, DiBiase regains the advantage with a spinebuster pin that gets him 2 followed by a running powerslam that also gets him a 2 count. Frustrated, DiBiase tries to go for the Dreamstreet finisher but Carlito counters with an armdrag and then as DiBiase looks for a clothesline, Carlito ducks, comes off the ropes and hits a springboard reverse elbow that takes his opponent down. Stalking DiBiase, it is clear that Carlito is setting for the Backstabber but DiBiase grabs the ropes instead and Carlito’s attempt fails ... DREAMSTREET! DIBIASE HITS DREAMSTREET TO A DAZED CARLITO!

** 1 **
** 2 **
** 3 **​

WINNER:
TED DIBIASE (4:38) via pinfall

Carlito’s first singles match since his return ends in defeat as a smug look of superiority spreads over the face of DiBiase, his good run of form continuing again tonight. As his money plays out around the arena, DiBiase signals that he will be the next US Champion as we see a shot of Justin Gabriel, ready for his match against Wade Barrett later tonight, who has been watching on. He pats his US Championship belt as he looks at the TV screen and shakes his head before walking away. As the camera returns to DiBiase, he smirks, his plan is working. But, as JR reminds us, when will he take his chance to face Gabriel for the gold?

The camera switches backstage once more and we see a limosine pulling into the parking lot that the crowd begin to boo – it is obvious who this must be. The door opens and out steps Michael Cole, the SMACKDOWN General Manager, as well as John Cena, SMACKDOWN’s Royal Rumble winner. Huge boos and jeers around the arena as Cena looks on smugly, he pats Michael Cole on the back and they begin to walk towards the backstage area – ten security guards appear and surround Cena and Cole as they make their way into the arena to ensure that there will be no trouble between Cena and a certain Mr. Orton tonight as we head into a commercial ...

*** COMMERCIAL BREAK ***​

RAW returns with a replay of Cole and Cena’s arrival as JR and King hype up Cena’s big proposition for Randy Orton tonight, what could that proposition be? And where is Randy Orton tonight? Does he know that John Cena has arrived on RAW?

*** WE ARE ONE ***

*** WADE BARRETT ***
(w/Nexus) | WWE Champion​

Accompanied this time by the Nexus team, Barrett heads out looking confident with the WWE Championship belt strapped arounf his waist. King and JR replay the closing moments of the Number 1 contender match which opened the show where we see a surprise win for John Morrison as he caught Kurt Angle with a roll up before we see Morrison and Barrett looking at each other after the match. Barrett appears to not be worried in the slightest about his Elimination Chamber challenger as he stands in the centre of the ring with the Nexus stood behind him, backing him up as always, Skip Sheffield, Ezekiel Jackson, David Otunga and Heath Slater. JR and King say that tonight will be interesting as former Nexus member Justin Gabriel faces Barrett and there have been a few strange issues between Nexus and Gabriel lately ...

*** AFRICA RISING ***

*** JUSTIN GABRIEL ***
US Champion​

The South African, growing in popularity recently, heads out to the ring and holds his US Championship belt up high for the WWE Universe to see. JR and King elaborate on the problems with Nexus and Gabriel and say that it seems as if Nexus is trying to protect Gabriel – at the Rumble for example – and are maybe trying to persuade him to come back to the group. However, Gabriel wants nothing to do with them and is focused on his US Championship where he is due to meet Ted DiBiase in the near future. Gabriel jumps into the ring after saluting the fans, it is time for a non-title champion vs. champion match. As Gabriel prepares, Nexus head over to him and Skip Sheffield offers him a handshake. Gabriel refuses and tells them to stay out of his business as Barrett looks on with a slight look of anger in his face over his team’s actions. The referee ushers Nexus out of the ring and they station themselves around the outside, ominously, as the bell rings ...

SINGLES MATCH
JUSTIN GABRIEL vs. WADE BARRETT (w/Nexus)

Nexus stay out of the contest and what a close one it turns out to be as Gabriel takes it to the WWE Champion big time as he looks for a huge breakout win that will elevate his status. Whatever Barrett does, it seems that Gabriel has an answer and with Nexus reluctant to cause any kind of distraction, it seems as if Barrett cannot get a foothold in the match. Gabriel’s speed and agility means that he can avoid the power moves of Barrett and this frustrates the WWE Champion. Consequently, he makes mistakes and this leads to a near fall when Barrett misses with a huge right hand and Gabriel takes advantage with a combination of kicks to take Barrett down to his knees, then a DDT that drives Barrett’s forehead into the mat. Barrett recovers at 2 but it seems Gabriel is on top of this one. As Barrett catches his breath in the corner, Gabriel rushes over and hits a step up enzuguri kick that staggers Barrett again, up the ropes goes the South African ... Hurricanrana! 1 ... 2 ... No! So close for Justin Gabriel! The match continues and the frustration builds for Barrett as Gabriel is out-thinking and out-working him until he suddenly catches him coming off the ropes with a huge side slam. A smug look spreads over his face as he finally grounds Gabriel before he steps back and hits a stiff kick to the side of the head as well for good measure. He sets up for Wastelands but Gabriel uses his elbows to wriggle clear and drop behind Barrett, roll up from Gabriel ... 1 ... 2 ... Oh! Nearly! Barrett rolls out of the ring, he needs time to compose himself but he isn’t going to get it – Gabriel leaps onto the top rope and springboards out of the ring into a moonsault ... Barrett reacts instinctively as he sees Gabriel coming towards him and he pulls Heath Slater into the way instead and he is taken out by the moonsault instead. Gabriel looks down at Slater with a look of confusion but then Barrett sticks him in the side of the head again with a big boot before savagely going on the attack with right hands.

The referee is counting the pair of them out – Gabriel is down and taking a battering now from the WWE Champion as Nexus look after Slater who was taken down with the moonsault a moment ago. Finally, Barrett heeds the referee’s words and he rolls Gabriel back into the ring as well as himself. Barrett looks out to his Nexus team and there is little bit of tension in the air, Slater looks less than impressed over what just happened, but Barrett waves it off and says it was part and parcel of being out there. As Gabriel slowly gets up, Barrett lifts him onto his shoulder and sets up ... WASTELANDS! BARRETT SLAMS GABRIEL DOWN TO THE MAT WITH WASTELANDS!

** 1 **
** 2 **
** 3 **​

WINNER:
WADE BARRETT (6:47) via pinfall

Barrett is delighted with his win and he smirks as he holds up his WWE Championship despite the heat and the jeers he is now getting from the WWE Universe. Nexus roll back into the ring and Barrett goes over to Heath Slater and he claps him on the back, Slater seems OK with him now, they stand together as Gabriel sneaks away from the ring holding the back of his head, disappointed to have lost. As he looks back at the ring, Otunga looks to him with a look of admiration on his face – what is going on with Nexus and Gabriel here? RAW switches gear now as we head to the interview area where Josh Mathews is stood waiting again ...

JOSH MATHEWS:
Ladies and Gentlemen, please welcome my guest at this time ... the Viper, RANDY ORTON!

Huge pop for the Viper as he comes into view, a look of quiet contemplation on his face as he prepares to hear what Cena has to say later tonight ...

JOSH MATHEWS:
Randy, he’s here tonight. John Cena is in the arena, we’ve seen him arrive, he has a proposition for you. What are you planning to do tonight?

Orton nods his head as he thinks carefully about his answer ...

RANDY ORTON:
Josh, I’d be lying if I said I was calm and collected right now. For months, John Cena has ducked me, screwed me and cheated me. And tonight, he thinks he can just show up here on RAW and I’m going to stand there and listen to him? The voices in my head aren’t telling me to stand still and be a good boy, Josh, they’re telling me to RKO Cena over and over again. (Pop from the arena who are in agreement) They’re telling me to RKO him and then punt him in the skull so hard that he won’t make WrestleMania 28 never mind WrestleMania 27.

JOSH MATHEWS:
But Randy, with all due respect, you can’t do that, can you? You’ve been warned that you must not ...

Orton twitches, something annoying him about Matthews’ comment. He stares out into the space, a look of intensity in his eyes ...

RANDY ORTON:
I know what I’ve been warned to do, Josh. But do you know what? I think it’s funny that I’m reminded not to touch Cena but nothing seems to be happening when Cena interferes in my business. Have you noticed that? Cena is a coward. He hides behind Chip Butty, he hides behind Michael Cole, he hides behind rules that suit him and he has everything made for him here in WWE. He thinks that he is safe because he surrounds himself with security personnel tonight? He thinks that Chip Butty’s warnings to me make him safe? There’s an old saying, Cena, it goes like this: ‘Desperate men do desperate things’ and do you know what? I’m desperate. I’m desperate to make you pay. I’m desperate to make you suffer. I’m desperate to hit you with an RKO and I’m desperate to punt you in the skull. You’ve cheated me out of the WWE Championship, you’ve cheated me out of the WrestleMania main event and you’ve cheated me out of the Royal Rumble. I think it is time that you ...

Orton is distracted as the RAW General Manager Shawn Michaels comes into view. To describe the relationship between these two as frosty would be an understatement, Orton does not trust HBK at all. HBK looks apologetic but he has a message to deliver from Chip Butty ...

SHAWN MICHAELS:
Randy, I know that you’re desperate to get your hands on Cena but you need to listen to me. I have a message from Ch ...

RANDY ORTON:
You know what, Michaels? Maybe I don’t care? I don’t trust you, you were the one who made that match back at Survivor Series – Team Orton vs. Nexus. You made it for the WWE Championship, you tried to force me to work with Cena to defend my title. Like I’ve already said, I don’t care what you have to say and what warnings Chip Butty has about suspending me from WrestleMania 27. I’m not in the main event, I’m not in the title situation.

HBK sighs and holds up his hands.

SHAWN MICHAELS:
Trust me, Randy, nobody regrets the decision I made before the Survivor Series more than I do. If I’d known what Cena was planning to do ...

HBK shakes his head over the situation as Orton stares at him intensely ...

SHAWN MICHAELS:
But this isn’t about WrestleMania 27, Randy. Chip Butty has told me to tell you that if you touch John Cena tonight ... (HBK sighs again, he clearly doesn’t agree with this) ... well, he says he is going to fire you.

Huge boos and jeers for this announcement as Orton stares at HBK, that makes the situation more grave for Orton than it was. Surely he won’t risk losing his entire career over this? The camera zooms in on a thoughtful looking Orton, his eyes flickering with anger, as he considers his actions. The camera switches to the locker room where Matt Striker is stood with the new Number 1 contender for the WWE Championship, John Morrison ...

MATT STRIKER:
John, congratulations, man! Number 1 contender for the WWE Championship!

Striker and Morrison slap hands, the interviewer is clearly pleased for one of the nicest guys in the business. Morrison removes his shades and speaks into the microphone ...

JOHN MORRISON:
Matt, I feel amazing, I’m going to be challenging for the WWE Championship in three weeks! This is my chance, you know? For the past year, I’ve been working my butt off to get an opportunity like this and now I have it. Wade Barrett, he can guarantee that at the Elimination Chamber, he is in for the fight of his life!

The smile on Morrison’s face seems fixed, he can’t stop smiling. However, the afore mentioned Wade Barrett walks into the locker room and the atmosphere changes a little. Morrison prepares for a fight but it is not needed as Barrett just wants a word. He looks at Morrison with a smirk and then holds the WWE Championship ...

WADE BARRETT:
You know what, John? I’m going to go ahead and congratulate you on your win. I’m looking forward to our match at the Elimination Chamber, do you know why? (Morrison moves a step closer to Barrett) It’s going to be a walk in the park. John, you’re just a high flying guy who is overachieving big time and at Elimination Chamber I will prove to the world that you are not worthy of being in the main event. You think you deserve to be the WWE Champion? You think that you deserve to defend this title at WrestleMania 27?

Morrison looks longingly at the WWE Championship with a fire in his eyes after Barrett’s comments.

JOHN MORRISON:
Do I think I deserve it? You better believe I do, Wade. I’ve worked my ass off for years to get to this point and I will not waste it. But I have a question for you – do you deserve to defend the WWE Championship at WrestleMania? (Barrett’s eyes flicker with anger) You see, I’ve been watching you, Wade, I’ve been watching your reign as WWE Champion and it’s pretty clear to me ... You don’t deserve to hold that title.

WADE BARRETT:
John, John, John, you’re speaking drivel now, you should know that ...

JOHN MORRISON:
I should know what, Wade? I know a few things. I know that if it wasn’t for John Cena stabbing Randy Orton in the back at Survivor Series, you would never have won it. I know that Justin Gabriel played a huge part in you winning the title as well. Wade, I know that whenever you’ve defended that title since – against Orton, Angle, Triple H – I know that you’ve relied on Nexus every time to rescue you and save your title. Now you tell me again, do you deserve to defend that title at WrestleMania?

Barrett is seething with rage but he has no answer right now, Morrison presses home his advantage ...

JOHN MORRISON:
I think, Wade, deep down inside, you know it too. At Elimination Chamber, why not prove it? At Elimination Chamber, Wade, face me one on one, no Nexus, no outside interference. Leave your muscle men behind, face me one on one and prove that you deserve to headline WrestleMania 27. Unless you know that you can’t Wade ...

Morrison looks into the WWE Champion’s eyes and he waits for an answer but Barrett stays silent and simply turns and walks out of the locker room. It seems that Morrison has just gotten the better of their first war of words as the build up to the Elimination Chamber starts to heat up here on RAW and we head into a commercial break with the news that next up will be the Elimination Chamber Qualifying match between two WWE legends – Chris Jericho and Edge.

*** COMMERCIAL BREAK ***​

 

[GCB]

*** COMMERCIAL BREAK ***​

RAW returns with the camera focused on the ring as we get ready for the next match of the evening ...

*** METALINGUS ***

*** EDGE ***​

As his pyro explodes behind him and the smoke begins to clear, Edge strides confidently to the ring with a smile on his face. JR and King remind us that despite the reluctance of HBK to give Edge this opportunity tonight, it was the WWE owner Chip Butty who made the match and gave Edge the chance to earn his spot in the Elimination Chamber. The Rated R Superstar stands on the ropes and raise his rock horns to the crowd who boo and jeer him, he still remains unpopular for his recent actions.

*** 5 ***
*** 4 ***
*** 3 ***
*** 2 ***
*** 1 ***

*** BREAK THE WALLS DOWN ***

*** CHRIS JERICHO ***​

More explosions as Jericho makes his way out, another man with a murky past few months, but he is cheered by the crowd after his recent change in attitude. Back in his Y2J persona, Jericho is stood with his back to the audience and his arms out before he turns to walk down to the ring, slapping hands with the fans as he walks. Standing at the foot of the ramp, Jericho looks up and smirks at Edge before he reveals that he has a microphone and raises it to signal for his music to be faded out ...

CHRIS JERICHO:
Welcome to ... RAW ... IS ... JERICHO!

Huge pop for Jericho as he brings back one of his legendary catchphrases and he smirks as he stands there taking in the adulation of the fans. Meanwhile, Edge stands in the ring with a look of annoyance on his face as Y2J makes him wait ...

CHRIS JERICHO:
Lexington, Kentucky ... (Cheap pop for Y2J) ... let me tell you this, Y2J has been waiting for months for this moment ... And I know that all of you Jerichoholics have been waiting years for this moment ... tonight, Y2J will prove once more that I am the best in the world and I will qualify for the Elimination Chamber ...

Jericho steps up the ring steps as he continues to speak as he enters the ring opposite from Edge who is urging the referee to start the match.

CHRIS JERICHO:
You quieten down a minute, junior, let me finish first ... (The referee has to restrain Edge as Jericho smirks at him) ... You come out here with your rock horns but let me tell you something – there is only one guy here in the WWE who is the true ... ‘Ayatollah ... of Rock n’ Rolla’ ...

More cheers for Jericho as he tries to get under the skin of his opponent tonight ...

CHRIS JERICHO:
... and tonight, in front of all of these Jerichoholics in attendance here, I will show everybody that the Rated R Superstar is actually a Rated R ... jackass!

Edge snaps and he rushes over and attacks Jericho with a look of fury on his face. As the microphone crashes down to the mat, Edge starts to pound away furiously at the face of Y2J as the crowd rise to their feet in excitement. The referee urges Edge to leave it but he ignores him and continues to beat down Jericho before he pops him off to the ropes and hits a flapjack. With Y2J down and recovering in the corner, Edge pulls back and waits in the corner ... SPEAR! EDGE HITS THE SPEAR TO JERICHO! Edge hooks the leg but the referee is shaking his head and castigating Edge for his actions instead of counting – the match never got started here. Edge is furious and he tries to intimidate the referee over the lack of a 3 count. Angered, Edge drops out of the ring as the referee signals that the match never started to the WWE Universe ...

SINGLES MATCH
CHRIS JERICHO vs. EDGE

WINNER:
NO CONTEST

Edge is on the outside as Jericho recovers a little in the ring, Y2J’s words seem to have angered him. He grabs a steel chair and things step up in severity as he slides back into the ring looking to use it. The referee is trying to hold him back as he prepares to make use of the chair but Edge shoves the referee over and he topples out of the ring through the ropes. Edge holds the chair and waits for Jericho to spin round ... he swings but Jericho ducks under the chair ... CODEBREAKER! JERICHO HITS THE CODEBREAKER! Edge’s head snaps back and then Jericho picks up the chair as well, he is ready to use it on Edge now! As Jericho prepares to strike, there is a commotion as Sheamus comes hurtling towards the ring. The Celtic Warrior hits an axe handle to the back of the head of Jericho and he falls to the floor without using the chair ... However, here comes Daniel Bryan as well! Two Elimination Chamber qualifiers and two guys who should have been involved in a Qualifying match tonight as well. Bryan goes after Sheamus and all hell breaks loose now as all four men fight in the centre of the ring, Sheamus and Edge teaming against Jericho and Daniel Bryan before officials and security spill out into the ring to split the four men up. Finally, they manage to restore order but it is clear that there are many issues between them that may need to be resolved down the line – JR and King discuss what this means for one of the spots in the Chamber as we move forward towards the pay-per-view ...

*** COMMERCIAL BREAK ***​

RAW returns with the cameras in the backstage area where we see Kurt Angle stood in the locker room with the two mystery men from last week. Angle is speaking to them in hushed tones as the camera rolls and then in walks Matt Striker. From the look of Angle and the two guys with him, they were expecting him ...

MATT STRIKER:
Kurt, you wanted some time to speak to the WWE Universe?

Angle takes the microphone from Striker and then he shoves him aside, it appears Angle wants to address the WWE Universe himself without the distraction of the interviewer, Striker. He beckons to the two mystery men to stand either side of him and then he prepares to speak to the WWE Universe watching on the titantron and back at home on the TV ...

KURT ANGLE:
I’m sure you all saw these two men on RAW last week, I’ve been barraged with texts, emails and Tweets all week about their identity. Now, you all know that I am a passionate believer in the three I’s ... (Boos for the mention of the 3 I’s) ... Intensity. Integrity. Intelligence. I’m not sure how many of these morons in Lexington understand the importance of these principles but let me assure you that they remain an integral part of my life.

Angle smirks as the Lexington crowd chant ‘Angle sucks!’ before shaking his head and continuing.

KURT ANGLE:
You see, I was fed up of people taking cheap shots at me so I decided that I needed to protect myself. People like Triple H and Randy Orton will never again be able to take me down as I have these two men here to watch my back. They display all three of the principles that I believe in, they are committed to being part of ... ‘Team Angle Version 2’ ... and I know that they will help me to regain the WWE Championship.

Heat for the two men and Angle at the announcement of ‘Team Angle v2’ and Angle’s announcement that he plans to win the WWE Championship again. Angle beckons his two team-mates forward to showcase them ...

KURT ANGLE:
Allow me to introduce them. First up, this man here is truly perfection. He is the son of former WWE legend, Mr. Perfect, he is a man who I know I can count on. Ladies and Gentlemen, let me introduce to you ... JOE HENNIG!

Boos echo around the arena as Hennig looks on and smirks. He shakes his head at the reaction from the WWE Universe and laughs as Angle mutters something that the microphone does not pick up. Next up, the other guy steps up a little so he can be introduced ...

KURT ANGLE:
And this man here, this is ... PERCY WATSON. Both of these men are superstars of the future, two men who will go on to win World Championships. They will get chance to learn from myself, I will teach them the importance of integrity, intensity and intelligence.

Both Percy Watson and Joe Hennig nod their heads in agreement, they are clearly delighted to be working with and learning from the Olympic gold medal winner. Angle inclines his head to both men in turn and then faces the camera one more time to flash an arrogant grin as RAW rolls on and the camera switches back to the ring ...

*** TIME TO PLAY THE GAME ***

*** TRIPLE H ***​

The crowd pop big time as the Game, the Cerebral Assassin himself, Triple H heads towards the ring where he is looking to secure himself a spot in the Elimination Chamber match and a shot at the WWE Championship come WrestleMania 27. However, as King and JR remind us, winning a place in the Chamber match is not going to be easy for Hunter – he faces a Gauntlet match against all four of Wade Barrett’s Nexus team in order to qualify. Hunter looks less than impressed as he heads towards the ring but he spits water in the air and salutes the crowd as usual before he turns towards the referee and tells him to get the first guy out here ...

*** WE ARE ONE ***

*** SKIP SHEFFIELD ***​

Out heads Skip Sheffield, one of the Nexus powerhouses as they look to find a way to defeat Triple H and keep him out of the RAW Elimination Chamber match and therefore out of the WrestleMania 27 WWE Championship picture. Looking fired up, as Nexus always seem to do, Skip gets into the ring and he has some words for Hunter as he mouths off at him and declares that he will never ever be the WWE Champion again. Triple H smirks at the audacity of the inexperienced Sheffield and simply bides his time until the referee rings the bell and the match begins ...

GAUNTLET MATCH – 1 OF 4
TRIPLE H vs. SKIP SHEFFIELD

A severe test for Triple H in the first part of the Gauntlet match as he goes up against the ‘Cornfed Collossus’ Skip Sheffield who brings his power game to challenge the Game. It appears that the Nexus’ thinking is that Skip will be able to wear down Triple H first off and this certainly proves the case as he weathers the early momentum from the Game to take control and it looks as if Hunter is struggling to get past the first match of the potential four in the Gauntlet match. Sheffield goes close to defeating Triple H when he hits a huge clothesline that almost knocks Hunter out of his boots but he fails with the pinfall as Hunter shows resilience to kick out at 2. Sheffield hits powerslams over and over as he looks to finish Hunter and get a big win for himself to propel him up the ladder. However, Triple H shows his abilities as he catches Skip with an Atomic Drop before a spinebuster follows to buy him some recovery time. As Skip groggily gets to his feet, Hunter kicks him in the gut and sets him up ... PEDIGREE! TRIPLE H HITS THE PEDIGREE!

** 1 **
** 2 **
** 3 **​

WINNER:
TRIPLE H (6:38) via pinfall

Triple H rolls away and celebrates his first victory of four needed by retreating to the corner and taking some deep breaths as he looks to recover from a hard fought first match. Skip Sheffield though is annoyed and he brings a steel chair into the ring and stalks Triple H. Hunter senses him, spins and ducks underneath the attempted chair shot to the skull before kicking him in the gut once again ... PEDIGREE! A SECOND PEDIGREE FOR SKIP SHEFFIELD! Triple H kicks Skip out of the ring and throws the chair over the top rope after him, Triple H is glad to see the back of him. However, he is only 25% of the way to victory here tonight. The Nexus theme sounds out again and signals the arrival of his second opponent ...

*** WE ARE ONE ***

*** EZEKIEL JACKSON ***​

As soon as Jackson rolls into the ring, Triple H goes on the attack and kicks him hard in the head. The referee signals for the bell and the second match is underway ...

GAUNTLET MATCH – 2 OF 4
TRIPLE H vs. EZEKIEL JACKSON

Triple H appears to be bang in the groove now and he pounds away on a stunned Jackson as he looks to put him away quickly and decisively. However, despite several big moves from the Game, he is unable to put Jackson away and then the Guyanan Goliath is able to counter with some well placed elbows before he hits the German Suplex to Triple H and holds on ... 1 ... 2 ... Kick out from the Game! Jackson tosses Triple H into the ropes and then goes for a swinging right hand but the Game ducks under it and then whips Jackson to the ropes instead ... Flapjack! Triple H hits the flapjack to Jackson and then waits for him to get back to his feet. Kick to the gut, here we go again, Triple H sets up ... BAM! TRIPLE H IS SMASHED HARD IN THE BACK BY SKIP SHEFFIELD WITH A STEEL CHAIR! The referee looks shocked but then signals for the bell, Triple H wins again with a disqualification ...

WINNER:
TRIPLE H (2:46) via disqualification

Triple H is face down on the mat and is clutching his back as Skip stands over him with a look of fury in his eyes. Ezekiel Jackson slowly stands up and he slaps hands with Skip before looking down on Triple H as well. As the crowd boo and jeer, Skip drags Triple H up to his feet and then feeds him to Jackson who lifts him onto his shoulders ... TORTURE RACK! JACKSON STRETCHES HUNTER IN THE TORTURE RACK! Triple H is in real pain here and the referee is demanding that the Nexus members stop the assault ... Jackson drops Triple H down and the Game is writhing on the mat as he tries to recover ...

*** WE ARE ONE ***

*** DAVID OTUNGA ***​

Here comes the third member of Nexus, this time it is the A-lister, David Otunga. As he steps up the ring steps, he looks impressed with the state of Triple H and applauds Big Zeke. However, this is not over as up gets Triple H slowly ... CLOTHESLINE FROM SKIP SHEFFIELD! Skip’s clothesline to Hunter almost smashes his jaw as he connects. With Triple H in a crumpled heap on the mat, Jackson and Sheffield step out of the ring and they leave Otunga to take their place for the next stage of the Gauntlet match. The referee doesn’t want to but he has no choice and he signals for the bell for the third part ...

GAUNTLET MATCH – 3 OF 4
TRIPLE H vs. DAVID OTUNGA

Otunga waits for the bell and then barrels into the weakened Triple H and knocks him flying into the turnbuckles as he attempts to get to his feet. Otunga smashes Hunter over and over with right forearms as he looks for a quick win to end this Gauntlet match but his suplexes fail – three times he hits big suplexes, three times Hunter refuses to lie down and kicks out at 2. Frustration is building for Otunga and then he gets caught with a spinebuster by Triple H and the crowd go wild as they see that Hunter is heading towards the fourth match. Otunga slows him down though with a rake of the eyes and Hunter, the effects of the match now catching up with him, is caught out as he walks straight into Otunga’s big finisher ... THE VERDICT THRUST SPINEBUSTER! OTUNGA HITS THE VERDICT! He hooks Triple H’s leg and makes the cover ... 1 ... 2 ... Triple H stuns the arena by kicking out again! The referee is checking on both guys when he is suddenly shoved over and through the ropes, the camera pans around and we see that Heath Slater, the man scheduled to be the fourth man to face Hunter, has just shoved the referee out of the ring. The crowd boo and jeer but it isn’t going to make any difference. Slater and Otunga begin to lay the boots to Triple H while the referee is out of the ring, the crowd are sending powerful heat raining down on the pair of them but Slater and Otunga don’t give a damn. Slater notices the referee is stirring and he quickly exits the ring and goes to revive the referee more. As the referee is helped back into the ring, Hunter groggily gets to his feet, he is really struggling ... OTUNGA HITS THE VERDICT AGAIN! ANOTHER THRUST SPINEBUSTER! Otunga hooks the leg again ...

** 1 **
** 2 **
** 3 **​

WINNER:
DAVID OTUNGA (3:54) via pinfall

A stunned shock reverberates around the arena as Nexus manage to defeat Triple H in the main event and deny him his place in the Elimination Chamber match. The Nexus pair of Otunga and Slater exit quickly and they back away up the ramp where Sheffield and Jackson also come back out to congratulate them. As Triple H comes around and realises what has happened, he looks pissed off as he looks out at the celebrating Nexus foursome. Worse is to come as the WWE Champion Wade Barrett also heads out from backstage and he joins his team-mates on the ramp. Barrett looks straight out into the ring where Hunter is looking angered, he holds the WWE Championship up high and smirks at Triple H as he mocks him. Nexus watch on as Barrett continues to taunt Triple H and mock his failure to secure a spot in the Elimination Chamber tonight ...

*** COMMERCIAL BREAK ***​

RAW returns from the final commercial of the night with the camera focused on the ring ready for John Cena’s proposition for Randy Orton to end the show tonight ...

*** MY TIME IS NOW ***

*** JOHN CENA ***
(w/Michael Cole) | 2011 Royal Rumble winner​

Huge heat for Cena as he heads out towards the ring accompanied by the grinning SMACKDOWN General Manager, Michael Cole. Bearing a t-shirt that reads ‘BETTER THAN EVER’ and a ‘YOU CAN’T SEE ME’ logo on the back, Cena heads towards the ring looking confident over his safety. As he nears the ring, behind him we see ten security men following and they station themselves around the ring as Cena taunts the fans and declares that he will be the next World Heavyweight Champion. He grabs a microphone and then signals for his music to be faded as Cole also takes a microphone ...

JOHN CENA:
Wow, this is great. John Cena is back on Monday Night RAW!

The crowd here in Lexington respond with boos and jeers that must be hurting Cena’s ears, they’re so loud. Cena smirks though and makes an off the record comment to Michael Cole that makes the General Manager laugh. Cena continues on ...

JOHN CENA:
And it is a double treat for you all here tonight – the greatest General Manager in the history of the WWE is also here on RAW! Michael Cole!

Cole waves as Cena introduces him, what on earth has happened to Cena nowadays? He pats Cole on the shoulder as the crowd respond with nuclear heat here, they are not impressed and they let Cena know it. However, he is not interested and he mocks them by laughing ...

JOHN CENA:
You don’t like hearing the truth here in Kentucky do you? You know what, Michael, these type of fans are exactly the reason I despise the WWE Universe nowadays. They expect you to suck up to them, they expect you to lie and feed them a bunch of catchphrases just so that they can then expect you to shake their hands, sign their autograph books and pose for photos with their ugly children.

Cole laughs as Cena continues ...

JOHN CENA:
Here you go, Lexington ... Here is a catchphrase for you all ... YOU CAN’T SEE ME!

Cena waves his hand over his face as the WWE Universe boo and jeer him some more. Cole is laughing hard beside him and the two of them actually high five each other ...

JOHN CENA:
How about another one? In a couple of months time, after WrestleMania 27 is over, this is one you’re going to hear from me ... THE CHAMP ... IS ... HERE!

A loud ‘Cena sucks!’ chant begins as Cena laughs some more with Cole in the ring, the crowd here are sick of listening to Cena already ...

JOHN CENA:
And that is why I am here tonight. At WrestleMania 27, because I won the Royal Rumble, I have a World Championship match with whoever the World Champion is. I am ready to focus on this match now, I am sick to death of having to deal with Randy Orton who just will not go away ...

The crowd cheer at the mention of Orton and an ‘RKO! RKO!’ chant also begins ...

JOHN CENA:
You see, I would have thought that Orton would have given up by now. I took his WWE Championship from him, I left RAW and joined SMACKDOWN because I had continually proved that I was a better man than him, I beat him at Vengeance, I destroyed him at the Royal Rumble, I won the Royal Rumble when he was stupid enough to come back to the ring and I am now the Number 1 contender for the World Championship. Randy Orton should realise that he is not in my league, he should focus on facing some loser here on RAW that he might be able to beat ...

Cole laughs again at the jibe at RAW from the once revered Cena ...

JOHN CENA:
But, you know what, he just won’t give it up. He believes in his heart that he can beat me and he won’t go away until he does. So, tonight, I have a proposition for Orton, I have an announcement that I want to make right here, right now. So, Orton, why don’t you come out here, stand in the ring like a good boy and listen to what I have to say ...

*** VOICES ***

*** RANDY ORTON ***​

Cena’s comments are interrupted as Orton takes the first chance to come out here and he storms out of the backstage area and walks down to the ring with a real purpose. Security step up ready and Cena beckons to four of them to get into the ring for added protection. As Orton steps through the ropes and into the ring, Cena stands behind four security men and he visibly tells Orton to stay back. Orton looks wild with rage, he wants to kill Cena and he is so close to him here. As Orton strains against the security men as they hold him back, we see Chip Butty running down the ramp as well, the WWE owner gets booed and jeered as well as he approaches the ring. Butty runs up the steps and he has a microphone ...

CHIP BUTTY:
Orton! Orton! Orton, you better listen to me right now. I meant what I told Shawn Michaels earlier today. If you touch Cena, I will fire you on the spot, right here, right now. You better back down right now.

A look of rage passes across Orton’s face once more and he twitches as he has to hold himself back and keep away from attacking Cena who looks at him, over the security men, with a smug look on his face.

MICHAEL COLE:
Yeah, Randy, back off right now!

Cole smirks at Orton as he takes a step back, he realises that his career in the WWE is worth more than one attack on John Cena right now. Much as he wants to rip Cena apart right now, Orton backs away to the ropes to hear Cena’s proposition ...

JOHN CENA:
That’s better, Randy. Keep calm, it isn’t so difficult is it?

Orton’s rage reappears and he again takes steps towards Cena as the security are forced to hold him back once more ... Cena is deliberately goading him here and Orton is struggling to stay in control.

JOHN CENA:
Orton, listen to me, I’ll keep this short and sweet. I’m sick of this. I’m sick of you wanting to prove something to me. In nine weeks time, I am challenging for the World Championship and it is time for me to put this all behind me. I don’t need all of this bad blood with you.

Orton mouths off at Cena and tells him that the bad blood between them will never disappear but Cena carries on ...

JOHN CENA:
So here is what I am proposing to you, Orton. We end this once and for all. Elimination Chamber, you’ve not got a match, I’ve not got a match, let us sort this out once and for all.

Orton is smiling at this idea, he is already nodding his head and accepting the challenge.

JOHN CENA:
There is one condition though, Orton. Are you listening to this Michael Cole? Mr. Butty?

Cena looks at both the authority figures in the ring and they nod their heads to affirm that they are listening ...

JOHN CENA:
The condition is, Orton, we go one on one at the Elimination Chamber ... but it’s the last time ever.

Orton looks quizzically at Cena, waiting for more information here ...

JOHN CENA:
One final time, no rematches, no more sneak attacks ... Just me, you, a referee and one match to a finish. No disqualification. No countouts. Orton vs. Cena to the end. What do you say?

Orton is smirking as if Christmas comes early, this is everything that he wanted and many people are clearly wondering why Cena is offering this.

JOHN CENA:
You get your match with me, your chance to prove yourself one more time. I get to beat you one more time and end this before I head to WrestleMania. Are we on, Orton? What do you say?

Orton walks across to the owner of the WWE, Chip Butty, grabs his microphone and snarls into it ...

RANDY ORTON:
You’re on, Cena. You bet that you’re on. And this time, for the final time, I will give you the beating that you deserve, you won’t even make it to ...

JOHN CENA:
Yeah, yeah, yeah, Orton. I knew you’d say that. So we’re confirmed then. Elimination Chamber. Randy Orton. John Cena. One match, one final match, to a finish, the end of the line. You got that, Michael? Mr. Butty?

Once again, Cena looks to Butty and Cole who nod their heads. It appears to be official now, Cena will face Orton at the Elimination Chamber and the crowd are loving it.

JOHN CENA:
That’s decided then, Orton. I’ll see you at Elimination Chamber.

Cena and Cole make their way towards the ropes as Orton watches on, his face showing that he desperately wants to attack Cena but he knows he needs to wait now. Cena steps halfway through the ropes and then pauses ...

JOHN CENA:
Oh, by the way, Orton. Good luck!

Orton stands his ground and doesn’t fly off the handle as Cena is expecting. Instead, Orton smirks and grimaces a little, he looks to Cena and mouths to Cena instead ... Suddenly, Orton pounces ... RKO! RKO ... TO MICHAEL COLE! Cena drops out of the ring and then turns to watch in astonishment as Orton kneels over the fallen SMACKDOWN General Manager with a maniacal grin on his face as he stares out to Cena. Butty is looking on with a look of shock on his face, this wasn’t expected but it isn’t something that Orton can be fired for! Cena watches on as Orton steps back and two security men try to stop him but he grabs them and flings them over the ropes and out of the ring. As Cole slowly recovers a little, it is clear that Orton has something huge in mind and he prepares in the corner waiting for his chance to strike ... The crowd are stood in excitement as they wait, here comes the Punt! Michael Cole is unaware of what is coming, he gets to his knees and then Orton takes strides across the ring ... Just as he is set to swing his right boot though, Cena drags his General Manager out of the ring instead, saving him at the last second and they back away up the ramp with Cena looking shocked and Cole looking beaten ... The cameras alternate between the worried Cena and the raging Orton in the ring as JR and King hype it up ... ELIMINATION CHAMBER 2011: JOHN CENA WILL FACE RANDY ORTON!

*** END OF SHOW ***

***********************************

ELIMINATION CHAMBER 2011
*** CONFIRMED MATCHES ***

GRUDGE MATCH
John Cena vs. Randy Orton

SMACKDOWN ELIMINATION CHAMBER MATCH FOR THE WORLD CHAMPIONSHIP
CM Punk (c) vs. Big Show vs. Kofi Kingston vs. Jeff/Matt Hardy vs. Kane/Undertaker vs. ???

RAW ELIMINATION CHAMBER MATCH TO DETERMINE #1 CONTENDER FOR WWE CHAMPIONSHIP AT WRESTLEMANIA 27
Daniel Bryan vs. Kurt Angle vs. The Miz vs. Sheamus vs. ??? vs. ???

WWE CHAMPIONSHIP
Wade Barrett (c) vs. John Morrison

DIVAS CHAMPIONSHIP
Maryse (c) vs. Layla vs. Michelle McCool (?)

*** SUNDAY 20TH FEBRUARY LIVE AND EXCLUSIVE ON PAY PER VIEW ***

*** END OF SHOW ***​

 

[GCB]

NXT isn't coming as easily as I hoped it would so I've made the decision to summarise it - the main point of NXT will become clear as it builds towards WrestleMania. As you can see, Rock has been 'taken out' and has been 'replaced' - he was too big for NXT if I'm honest. Don't rule him out from a return!

NXT
SEASON 3, EPISODE 6

WELLS FARGO ARENA, DES MOINES, IOWA
TUESDAY FEBRUARY 8TH, 2011

*** RESULTS & SUMMARY ***​

For the first time in this season of NXT, two men would be in danger of heading out of the competition and seeing their dream of earning a WWE or a World Heavyweight Championship match ended. In addition to this, the first five men eliminated from NXT this season will see their WWE contracts terminated – incentive indeed for both men to do everything they could to survive. After last week’s NXT, the standings looked like this ...

The bottom two ranked individuals were scheduled to face off in the first NXT Elimination match but Kaval, positioned 8th, earned immunity from the first two eliminations in the NXT Battle Royal at the Rumble two weeks ago. Therefore, 6th ranked Dolph Ziggler and 7th ranked MVP would be the two men to face off this week on NXT.

MVP ELIMINATED!
In the NXT main event, it would be Ziggler and MVP battling for survival, both men desperate to earn the win and secure their future for a little while longer. MVP’s mentor JBL had words of advice for MVP – he told him that in order to survive, MVP needed to listen to him and follow his advice rather than pander to the WWE Universe. However, MVP remained conflicted throughout the night and when he failed to join Drew McIntyre and Vladimir Kozlov in assuring JBL that Kaval would be destroyed, MVP was told that he was on his own by his mentor. That proved to be pivotal in the end – when MVP hit the ‘Drive By’ kick to Ziggler and appeared to have the match won, Ziggler had Vickie Guerrero on hand to distract the referee and save her man. When Ziggler later hit the ‘Zig Zag’ to MVP, there was nobody to save MVP and his shoulders were counted to the mat for the 1, 2, 3, to confirm his elimination from NXT and the end of his time in the WWE.

WHO ATTACKED THE ROCK? FOLEY TO DEPUTISE!
The show began with CCTV footage showing blurred footage of Rock being attacked in the parking lot as NXT ended last week. With the attackers wearing masks and black clothing, it proved impossible to do anything other than speculate over their identities before it was announced that Rock is going to be missing from NXT indefinitely. JBL took to the ring and he scoffed at claims that he was involved as he informed the WWE Universe that he was in the ring at the time of the attack and that he had a cast iron alibi. However, he appeared to be less than worried over his fellow mentor’s health, preferring to point out the advantage his team would now have. As JBL pointed out that Team Rock were now missing their leader though, ‘Wreck’ hit and out came SMACKDOWN announcer and good friend of Rock, Mick Foley. Foley alleged that JBL must have something to do with the attack – JBL threatened legal action over the slanderous remarks – before going on to inform JBL that he would be replacing the Rock whilst he was absent. How will this effect Ziggler, Khali, Truth and Chavo’s chances of winning NXT now? Kaval certainly believes that having a good mentor plays an important role – he informed Team Rock that he envied them for having Foley on their sides.

KOZLOV ON A ROLL!
After their recent issues, things came to a head between former partners Santino Marella and NXT competitor Vladimir Kozlov as they went one on one in a Street Fight. Despite making the challenge last week to the Russian, Santino had no answer to Kozlov’s power moves and he succumbed to these and began to struggle. When JBL encouraged Kozlov to make use of the weaponry on tap, Santino took a real bludgeoning and, in the end, it was academic – Kozlov powerbombed Santino on the stage and covered him for the 3. With Kozlov, ranked second on NXT right now, looking formidable, Santino looked to be in real trouble and later in the evening we found out that Santino would be missing for a while due to the injuries sustained. It’s fair to say that, out of these two, Kozlov had proven that he is the dominant half of the team.

KAVAL’s LOSING STREAK CONTINUES!
Despite his win in the Battle Royal at the Rumble, Kaval remains ranked last in the NXT competition – he is yet to win a match on NXT programming. That run continues after he lost tonight to the Sinister Scotsman, Drew McIntyre – a Future Shock DDT ended Kaval’s hopes of victory as JBL made it clear that he was now favouring McIntyre over Kaval. Kaval’s frustration afterwards was clear as he pounded his fists on the mat and, whilst he is safe for one more elimination even after tonight’s elimination of MVP, if he doesn’t start winning soon, he could find himself in big trouble quickly. When will Kaval manage to end the losing streak and move up the NXT rankings?

MICHELLE McCOOL ONE STEP CLOSER TO THE DIVAS CHAMPIONSHIP!
After last week’s announcement that the Elimination Chamber Divas Championship match between champion Maryse and former champion Layla would include Michelle McCool if she could go unbeaten until that night, McCool, with Kharma beside her of course, faced Eve Torres one on one in the first match of the evening. Despite a valiant effort from Eve, it seemed a matter of time before McCool would be able to get the upper hand and – thanks to a distraction from her bodyguard – she did just that. The ‘Wings of Love’ followed and McCool was able to get the 3-count that means she is now just two matches on NXT away from earning the Divas Championship match. Next week, McCool faces Alicia Fox as she looks to prove she deserves her chance.

*** RANKINGS AFTER WEEK 6 ***

** 1 **
Great Khali

** 2 **
Vladimir Kozlov

** 3 **
Chavo Guerrero

** 4 **
Drew McIntyre

** 5 **
R-Truth

** 6 **
Dolph Ziggler

** 7 **
Kaval

** ALREADY ELIMINATED **
MVP (Week 6)​

 

[GCB]

FRIDAY NIGHT SMACKDOWN LIVE
WELLS FARGO ARENA, DES MOINES, IOWA
FRIDAY FEBRUARY 4TH, 2011

*** DO YOU KNOW THE ENEMY? ***

*** PYRO ***
*** PYRO ***
*** PYRO ***
*** PYRO ***
*** PYRO ***

SMACKDOWN opens with the pyro as the camera spins around the arena, the WWE Universe going wild for the start of another exciting edition of SMACKDOWN here tonight as Todd Grisham and Mick Foley – still an announcer despite his new NXT duties standing in for The Rock – welcome us to the show ...

TODD GRISHAM:
Welcome to Friday night’s hottest show, we are live in Des Moines, Iowa, this is Friday Night SMACKDOWN – live! I’m Todd Grisham, my partner here is Mick Foley and what a night we have in store right here tonight, Mick?

MICK FOLEY:
This is what I got into the WWE for, Todd, we’ve got amazing matches – I cannot wait!

TODD GRISHAM:
The Tag Team Championships will be on the line tonight, Evan Bourne and Mark Henry will challenge the British Empire for the belts.

MICK FOLEY:
And I don’t know about you, Todd, but I’m already sick to death of hearing from William Regal and the Empire. Hopefully, tonight, Evan Bourne and Mark Henry can get the job done and take those titles away.

TODD GRISHAM:
With the Elimination Chamber just over two weeks from today, we’ll find out two of the remaining three participants in the SMACKDOWN Chamber match for the World Championship. We already know that World Champion CM Punk, Big Show and Kofi Kingston have qualified. The question is, first of all, which of the two Hardy Boys will win their place tonight?

MICK FOLEY:
Michael Cole thinks that he pulled a stroke last week when he tricked the Hardy Boys into thinking they’d both qualified for the Chamber when they defeated the Empire. However, with just one man to qualify, Matt and Jeff will go at it tonight – which one of the brothers will make it to the Chamber?

The camera switches to the side of the stage where a huge mound of earth stands with a grave dug out of the middle of it. The camera zooms in on the digger beside the mound which shows the bucket full of earth ready to be tipped into the grave ...

TODD GRISHAM:
And our main event tonight, Mick, what a match this will be for SMACKDOWN ...

MICK FOLEY:
Both of these guys are legends in this business, Todd, they will both be in the Hall of Fame but there is only one place for them in the Elimination Chamber!

The match card flashes up on screen ...

... before the camera focuses in on the gravestone ...

BURIED ALIVE
FEBRUARY 11, 2011
FRIDAY NIGHT SMACKDOWN

KANE
vs.
UNDERTAKER​

TODD GRISHAM:
One place in the Elimination Chamber, two legends of the WWE, one match ... Buried Alive!

MICK FOLEY:
Kane and the Undertaker, Todd, that’s all you need to know. Add in the Buried Alive stipulation and the Elimination Chamber reward, oh my, oh my, oh my!

TODD GRISHAM:
There’s no doubt about it, what a night we’re going to have ...

????:
Can I have your attention, please?

MICHAEL COLE
FRIDAY NIGHT SMACKDOWN GENERAL MANAGER​

The excitement in the arena turns quickly to heat as Michael Cole, grinning from ear to ear, strides out in his suit and tie. He walks towards the ring as he continues to address the WWE Universe ...

MICHAEL COLE:
Iowa, I know that listening to others is not your strong point so please just be quiet for a moment while I speak to the people watching on TV ...

Huge jeers and boos for the SMACKDOWN General Manager as he shakes his head in amusement. He steps up the stairs and he comes through the ropes where the boos intensify once again ...

MICHAEL COLE:
OK, OK, my name is Michael Cole ... (More jeers and boos from the crowd here in Des Moines) ... and I am the SMACKDOWN General Manager! (More boos from the crowd) Now, you can boo me all that you want, Iowa, the fact is that you’re all hyped up for the matches here tonight and there is one man that you should be thanking for them!

Cole spreads his arms and spins around, making it clear that that man is him, as the crowd continue to give him grief. Cole stands still again, chuckling, as he prepares to continue ...

MICHAEL COLE:
I mean, when has Shawn Michaels on RAW ever given you matches like I am tonight? When has Shawn Michaels given you a Tag Team Championship match lately? He has never even had the British Empire on his show!

Boos for the mention of the Empire who are clearly as unpopular in Des Moines as they are everywhere else!

MICHAEL COLE:
Yet I, Michael Cole, have made a Tag Team Championship match for tonight! The British Empire will face Mark Henry and Evan Bourne for the titles right here tonight!

Some cheers for the mention of this ...

MICHAEL COLE:
I’m also the man who had the foresight and vision to pit Matt and Jeff Hardy, two men who are about as interesting as dishwater normally, against each other tonight to fight for a place in the Elimination Chamber ...

Boos for this announcement, the crowd clearly believe that Matt and Jeff both earned their spot last week before Cole tricked them ...

MICHAEL COLE:
And look out over there! Look at that mound of earth over there ...

A buzz of excitement in the arena again as the camera focuses on the grave and the stone featured over near the stage ...

MICHAEL COLE:
You know who you have to thank for that? (Cole looks around once again as the crowd jeer) ME! ME! ME! ME! I’m the man who is making SMACKDOWN the greatest show ever seen in the WWE! The greatest General Manager that the WWE has ever seen.

Huge boos for the SMACKDOWN General Manager as he looks around for adulation that isn’t going to come his way here. He looks annoyed by this reception now ...

MICHAEL COLE:
You people need to learn some respect. There is no other city in the United States of America that treats me this way ...

Mick Foley laughs out loud on commentary, what a ridiculous statement that is from Cole. However, he genuinely seems to believe it and he is going to continue on further ...

MICHAEL COLE:
The rest of the WWE Universe know what an amazing job I am doing here on SMACKDOWN. I have already scheduled an amazing show but I’m sure that you’re all wondering ... (Cole backtracks a little to himself) Hang on, no! You’re incapable of wondering about anything. However, most people at home are probably wondering ... (More intense heat for Cole as he insults Iowa once more) ... who is going to be the final man in the SMACKDOWN Elimination Chamber match for the World Heavyweight Championship in two weeks time? You already know that it will be CM Punk defending against Big Show, Kofi Kingston, one of the Hardys and one of Kane or the Undertaker ... but who will the sixth man be?

Cole is making a big deal of this announcement, he clearly thinks it is a big one ...

MICHAEL COLE:
Well, I’ve been thinking about who deserves it. I’ve been thinking about who would have the best chance of winning the World Championship. And that man is ...

*** JUST CLOSE YOUR EYES ***

*** CHRISTIAN ***​

The crowd go crazy as Christian comes out from backstage – many of them think that Cole has allowed him to enter the match. However, in the ring, Cole is waving his arms and questioning what Christian is doing out here. It begins to dawn on the crowd that Cole is not referring to Christian who is walking out to the ring with a smile on his face. As he climbs the steps, Cole demands that Christian returns to the back and lets him continue with his announcement. However, Christian is having none of it and he steps through the ropes and shoves Cole aside before saluting the fans ...

MICHAEL COLE:
Cut the music! I SAID CUT THE MUSIC!

Cole looks angered here, he clearly didn’t expect to see Christian come out here tonight. Christian turns to him as his music fades and faces him with a glint in his eyes ...

MICHAEL COLE:
Christian, what the hell are you doing here? I called you earlier, I told you, I demanded that you stay away from SMACKDOWN tonight. You had your chance last week, I know that all you will want to do tonight is moan and cry ... (Christian laughs at Cole as the crowd boo once again) ... You’re not welcome here in my ring, you’re not welcome on my show tonight.

More boos as Christian smirks ...

CHRISTIAN:
You know what, Cole? When I received that call, I was pissed off. Yeah, I was. And I nearly didn’t board the flight here to Iowa tonight, I was going to stay away. After all, what would have been the point of coming?

Christian looks imploringly at Cole who makes to speak ...

CHRISTIAN:
Shut up, Cole! It’s time to listen to me!

Cole cannot believe how Christian just spoke to him and looks on flabbergasted as the crowd cheer Christian’s words ...

CHRISTIAN:
What changed my mind then? That’s what you’re thinking, right? What could possibly have made me decide to disobey the orders of my boss, the great Michael Cole?

Christian uses quote marks for the word ‘great’ to show his saracasm before continuing ...

CHRISTIAN:
Well, you see, Cole, I got another phone call. A phone call from the Board of Directors. Not Chip Butty, the Board of Directors that run the company, the people who ensure that the company is run correctly. And do you know what they told me, Cole?

Cole looks worried at this point ...

CHRISTIAN:
They told me that my Elimination Chamber qualifying match from last week ... was not what they told you to do. They told me that they told you to give me a fair chance at qualifying – in other words, Cole ... (Christian moves closer to the SMACKDOWN General Manager) ... not a Handicap match against Cena and Punk.

MICHAEL COLE:
Now, wait a minute, I was never ...

Christian knocks the microphone out of Cole’s hand and it lands with a buzz that echoes through the arena. Cole is looking angrier by the second and Christian is on a roll here to the delight of the fans ...

CHRISTIAN:
I told you, Cole, to shut up and listen.

Huge cheers for Christian as he puts a shocked Cole in his place once again ...

CHRISTIAN:
They told me that I should come to Iowa tonight ... (Pop for the mention of the home state) ... They told me that I would get a fair chance, tonight, one on one, to qualify for the Elimination Chamber. So, Michael Cole, it is over to you. Who am I going to face tonight? Who will be my opponent?

Cole picks up the microphone with a look of rage in his eyes, Christian is going to pay for his actions, of that there is no doubt. He straightens himself up and steadies himself to speak ...

MICHAEL COLE:
You’re right, Christian. You get your one on one match and – if you win – you can qualify for the Elimination Chamber. And your opponent ... Your opponent will be ... (Cole ponders for a second) ... Your opponent, Christian, will be ...

Suddenly, Cole reaches out and slaps Christian hard across the face, stunning the Canadian, before he quickly throws himself through the ropes and up the ramp before Christian has chance to retaliate. Christian is shocked and looks angered by Cole’s lack of respect, he rages and almost chases after him but composes himself ...

MICHAEL COLE:
... Yeah, did you like that Christian? You’re finished with SMACKDOWN, Christian. I’ll give you your shot tonight but nobody disrespects me. I’m the General Manager, damnit! You can have your match tonight, it will be one on one, you will qualify for the Chamber if you win ...

Cheers for this announcement but Cole is continuing and it seems, from his tone, this isn’t going to be good news ...

MICHAEL COLE:
... But if you lose, Christian, you will be fired from SMACKDOWN!

A worried look now passes the face of Christian as the WWE Universe boo and Cole smirks ...

MICHAEL COLE:
And your opponent for this match, Christian, the one you so desperately wanted ...

Cole mocks thinking about it a little more as Christian, rubbing the side of his face, watches on ...

MICHAEL COLE:
Your opponent will be a man I can trust to get the job done. Tonight, Christian, you face ... JOHN CENA!

Cole laughs as Christian looks on, his look of worry slowly turning to a look of determination. As Cole leaves, Grisham and Foley hype up the news – Christian vs. John Cena tonight on SMACKDOWN, if Christian wins then he qualifies for the Chamber, if he loses then he is fired from SMACKDOWN! A shocking development as SMACKDOWN heads into the first commercial of the evening ...

*** COMMERCIAL BREAK ***​

SMACKDOWN returns with a match card showing on the screen, it advertises the match tonight between Christian and John Cena as Foley and Grisham hype it up further and remind us of the stipulations announced by Cole moments ago ... The camera switches to the interview pit where Matt Striker is stood waiting ...

MATT STRIKER:
Ladies and Gentlemen, please welcome ... THE HARDY BOYS!

Huge cheer in the arena as Matt and Jeff Hardy both walk into shot ready for action later tonight ...

MATT STRIKER:
Guys, later tonight, thanks to Michael Cole last week, you two go one on one against each other for a place in the SMACKDOWN Elimination Chamber. Guys, I gotta’ ask you – how on earth are you going to face up to this match tonight?

Matt and Jeff look to each other for a moment, a look of respect for each other in their eyes, and then it is Matt Hardy who speaks first ...

MATT HARDY:
You know, Matt, last week when Cole put us in this match, our first reaction was to go and tell him to where to get off. He made us believe that we would both qualify if we won our match last week, then he tricked us and told us we’d get a shot at it by having to face each other this week. Now I know that Cole is a lying, cheating snake in the grass but this goes beyond low, Matt, he is facing two brothers to fight it out against each other. Now, that might be OK for Kane and the Undertaker but not for us.

JEFF HARDY:
Michael Cole is a no-good coward, we all know that. He has never liked the Hardy Boys and he has made it clear of late that Matt wouldn’t get a chance at the World Championship, he made Matt feel like quitting the WWE. But, you know, when I came back, I reminded Matt about why we got into this business in the first place. We didn’t get into this to win the WWE Championship or the World Championship. We got into this to simply be WWE wrestlers, together, living our dream. We’ve done that and we will continue to do that – regardless of whether we’re in the title picture or not.

MATT HARDY:
Jeff’s right, we’re both here to live our dream. If Michael Cole wants to make us fight for a chance to be in the Elimination Chamber, then he can, he is the General Manager. Tonight, we go out there, Matt Hardy vs. Jeff Hardy, we rock it Hardy style like nobody else can and, at the end of the match, one of us will go to the Chamber with the support of the other to try and win the World Heavyweight belt. And do you know what? I don’t care which of us goes after the belt. Tonight, all I care about is wrestling in front of the WWE Universe, one on one with my brother that I love, a chance to thrill the crowd and hear those cheers ...

Cheers come from the arena as Matt hypes them all up ...

MATT HARDY:
... and one of us will win, one of us will lose, but we both live our dream, we both compete in the WWE once again.

Matt hugs his brother before Jeff has the final word ...

JEFF HARDY:
It seems as if Michael Cole is hell bent on trying to force people here on SMACKDOWN out of the WWE. He’s trying to force out a good friend of ours in Christian, he’s messing with us as well. Tonight, the Hardy Boys show you, Cole, that nothing else matters apart from living our dream. But one of us will go to the Elimination Chamber, Cole, one of us will have a chance to win the World Championship. How will you feel then, Cole?

The camera switches back to the ring where it is time for the first match of the evening, a huge tag team match between some warring SMACKDOWN stars here tonight ...

*** REALEZA ***

*** ALBERTO DEL RIO ***
(w/Ricardo Rodriguez) | Intercontinental Champion​

As Rodriguez introduces the Mexican aristocrat, the Intercontinental Champion slowly drives his Ferrari out from behind the curtain into the arena on the opposite side to normal – on the other side of the stage is the mound of earth for tonight’s Buried Alive contest. Del Rio gets out of the car and waves his white scarf around before joining Rodriguez on the ramp as the golden rain falls from the roof and he poses. As he nears the ring, Grisham recounts the problems that Del Rio has been having recently with his fellow Mexican, Rey Mysterio, before showing a clip from SMACKDOWN several months ago ...

[YOUTUBE]-JC3LhZQDzQ[/YOUTUBE]​

As the camera returns to the ring, Del Rio’s music continues to play but he is stood astride the ropes with a huge grin on his face as he watches the footage of him injuring Rey Mysterio last September. Grisham and Foley discuss the impressive start that Del Rio has made to his career and the fact that he has only two losses to his name so far as well as the fact that he has won, and defended several times, the Intercontinental Championship.

*** CRANK IT UP ***

*** BIG SHOW ***​

The intimidating presence of the Big Show heads out and he is given heat from the WWE Universe as well after his recent actions as regards to Kofi Kingston. As Show approaches the ring, he threatens a few fans and verbally trashes a few more before stomping up the steps and into the ring where he roars. Grisham throws out to some more footage from last week – this time, Big Show’s attack on Kofi Kingston backstage after both had qualified for the Elimination Chamber World Championship match ...

... we see a jovial Kofi Kingston walking backstage.

He slaps hands with Trent Barretta who is wandering around and congratulates him, he gives a hug to Eve Torres and he also greets some of the other backstage members before opening the door to enter the locker room. As the door opens though, Kofi walks right into a huge ham of a fist ... BOOM! KNOCKOUT PUNCH! Kofi is knocked cold immediately and WWE officials swarm around him as the man who delivered the punch appears ... It’s BIG SHOW!

Show stands over the fallen Kofi and he smiles widely as he looks down on him. The officials plead with him to leave Kofi alone and then Show drops to one knee as he looks down on Kofi ...

BIG SHOW:
Congratulations on your win tonight, Kofi. I’ll see you in the Elimination Chamber!

The crowd boo as Show lifts himself back up and steps away from Kingston as if nothing has happened, smiling as he walks away and the medics have to tend to the fallen Ghanaian as well now.

Again, on return to the ring, Big Show smiles as he watches the footage before he slaps hands with Alberto Del Rio who he is partnering tonight. Foley says that Big Show needs to get some momentum going as he heads into the Elimination Chamber and tries to win back the World Championship that he recently held for just five minutes before dropping it to CM Punk, the moment when Show’s attitude probably began to change.

*** BOOYAKA BOOYAKA! 619! ***

*** REY MYSTERIO ***​

Huge cheers for the popular little Mexican as he comes out accompanied by exploding pyro before he heads for the ring via the younger children here in attendance tonight in Des Moines. Placing his forehead against the children’s in the crowd, Mysterio’s progress to the ring is slow but he finally gets to the bottom of the ramp and he stands looking up to Big Show and Alberto Del Rio, the man who injured him in September and tried to injure him again last week, whilst he waits for his partner tonight ...

*** S.O.S. ***

*** KOFI KINGSTON ***​

Out comes the Ghanaian Kofi Kingston, the man who has made so much progress up the SMACKDOWN ladder in the recent few months and come so close to capturing his first major WWE title – Grisham and Foley speculate on whether or not he could surprise everybody in two weeks and win the World Championship from CM Punk inside the Chamber? Foley suggests that Kofi would be a deserving World Champion and would be a great guy to have going into the SMACKDOWN main event at WrestleMania 27. As Kofi bounds down the ramp, he greets his friend, Rey Mysterio, before the pair of them slide into the ring and salute the fans in the corners. Show and Del Rio look on as the referee ensures they wait in their corner before the four men get rid of all their entrance attire and prepare themselves for the match ...

TAG TEAM MATCH
ALBERTO DEL RIO (w/Ricardo Rodriguez) & BIG SHOW vs. KOFI KINGSTON & REY MYSTERIO

The match begins with some kidology between Del Rio and Mysterio as the ‘Master of the 619’ is desperate to start the match against his nemesis, Del Rio. However, Del Rio, who was going to start, decides to allow Big Show to start instead once he sees Mysterio waiting. Mysterio urges Del Rio to get in and start but he refuses and this frustrates Rey who wants to get hold of the Intercontinental Champion desperately. Tired of waiting, Show grabs Mysterio by the head and drags him across the ring, it looks like David vs. Goliath but, when Show looks to hit a forearm across Rey’s back, Mysterio ducks under his arm and hits the ropes, springboards and dropkicks Show to start the action. Show staggers as Mysterio goes back to trying to bait Del Rio into the ring and arguments begin. Del Rio swings a punch at Rey who ducks it and dropkicks Del Rio who falls to the floor where Rodriguez fusses over him. However, this gives Show chance and he barrels into Mysterio with a shoulder block that takes him down. As Rey gets to his feet, Show forces him to the corner and starts hitting heavy right hands to the stomach of the Mexican as he pounds at him. Mysterio looks as if he is winded with every punch to the gut and then show grabs him by the throat and lifts him up high into a Military Press before throwing him head first out over the top rope to the outside. Mysterio lands with a thud and Kofi heads around towards his partner showing concern as SMACKDOWN heads into a commercial break with Grisham speculating about whether or not Rey will be able to get back into the match ...

*** COMMERCIAL BREAK ***​

SMACKDOWN returns with Big Show still in charge as he looks to put Mysterio away in the ring. A replay is shown of Show grabbing Kofi by surprise as he checked on Rey during the commercial break and throwing him head first into the barricades around the ring and when the camera returns we see Kofi struggling to get back into position for a tag from Mysterio. As Rey attempts to make the tag, Show grabs him and locks him into a Bearhug that drives the wind out of Rey once more, Show looks to lock it on as much as he can and try to force the submission from Mysterio who is weakening quickly here. As Mysterio loses the fight, Show wrenches the Bearhug in further and you can see Mysterio starting to struggle here. Kofi, now standing on the apron, tries to get the crowd involved and he leads a clap that gives Rey the impetus to try and force himself out of the Bearhug once more. However, Show is too strong and he now takes Rey down to the apron and continues to wrench around his gut. With Mysterio now spending up to two minutes in this hold, the referee is now forced to check on him. Mysterio looks beaten but Show has made a mistake taking it down to the mat as this now allows Rey, from a sitting position, to kick over his own head and he connects with Show several times to force a break. Both men get to their feet, Mysterio as quick as he can, he ducks a clothesline from Show, springboards off the ropes and goes for a Crossbody but Show catches him, readjusts and then drops Mysterio with a Sidewalk Slam that deflates the crowd once more.

** 1 **
** 2 **
** REY BARELY KICKS OUT! **​

Show drags Rey up and he sets him up in an inverted headlock before dropping his elbow across the little man’s chest again driving the wind out of him. Kofi again tries to get the fans to rally around Rey but this doesn’t look good. Show now locks in a Camel Clutch and Rey screams in pain, this is turning into an absolute demolition job here. Show is taunting Kofi as he frustratingly waits for a tag that doesn’t seem to be coming before releasing the clutch and tossing Rey away to the corner where Del Rio is looking on delighted. Show again taunts Kofi before running over towards Rey, Springboard Splash in the corner and Rey is splatted on the canvas. Surely this is over now? Show stands up grinning and pulls down his strap to signal that it is time for this to end. He clenches up his fist and roars but then Del Rio urges him to make the tag. Show questions this but relents and tags in the Intercontinental Champion who stands over his rival and mocks him and the WWE Universe as he smiles. However, this proves to be a mistake as it gives Mysterio time to make a desperate move, he crawls through Del Rio’s legs and springboards off the ropes, Hurricanrana from Mysterio to Del Rio! Show is holding his head in his hands in their corner and demands to be tagged back in which Del Rio does with a look of embarrassment on his face. However, the time is enough, Rey dives across the ring ... and tags in Kofi! Fired up and ready to go, Kofi leaps onto the top rope and springboards towards the onrushing Show with a Missile Dropkick to the head that delights the fans. Show is staggered to the corner and Kofi rushes over, leaps up onto his shoulders and starts to pound away at Show’s bald head, over and over, as the crowd roar their approval. Show recovers a little and shoves Kofi off his shoulders to the mat but Kofi is like a cat and bounces up quickly, he springboards off the ropes and catches Show’s head ... DDT! Show is driven down head first into the mat as Kofi makes the cover ...

** 1 **
** 2 **
** BIG SHOW POWERS OUT! **​

Kofi runs at Show once more but this time Show is ready and hits a boot to the face of Kingston before tagging in Del Rio once more. Del Rio hits a Roundhouse kick to the shoulder and upper arm of Kofi before dropping it down over the top rope to aggravate the pain a little more. Kofi’s arm is hurt a little by this and more so when Del Rio hits a double knee to the arm moments later as he looks to set up his finishing move. Kingston is clutching his arm but he is able to counter the forthcoming Cross Arm Breaker attempt from Del Rio as he rolls him up into a pinfall ...

** 1 **
** 2 **
** DEL RIO ROLLS OUT! **​

Del Rio hits a running knee to the face of Kofi and then stands over him with a look of annoyance. As Kofi gets up groggily, Del Rio again looks to set up the Rolling Cross Arm Breaker but this occurs too close to the ropes and Kofi, despite being locked into the hold, grabs the rope immediately. The referee demands the release of Kofi and Del Rio uses up the 5 count before releasing and kicking Kofi under the bottom rope. Del Rio stalks after him and rams his arm down on the steel steps as he looks to continue to weaken Kofi. As Kofi rolls back in, Del Rio follows and sneaks behind him, locks his hands around his waist and goes for a German Suplex. However, Kofi able to escape and he turns on a surprised Del Rio, Frankensteiner! Kofi quickly springboards off the ropes and leaps high in the air into a Diving Crossbody that takes Del Rio down to the mat. Kofi turns towards his corner for the tag but Rey is still struggling and the delay gives Del Rio chance to drag Kofi away. Again, Del Rio goes for the Cross Arm Breaker but Kofi refuses to allow it and he spins out of it and then hits another dropkick to the chest of the Mexican. With Del Rio down, Kofi comes off the ropes ... Boom Drop! Del Rio is looking for a tag now but Kofi hooks the leg and makes the pinfall ...

** 1 **
** 2 **
** DEL RIO KICKS OUT! **​

Looking for some space, Del Rio exits the ring but this proves to be another mistake – Kofi hits the ropes and goes towards him with a huge Suicide Dive that connects and drives Del Rio into the barricades as the crowd cheer. Kofi drags the Intercontinental Champion up and rolls him into the ring before following. However, Show drags Kofi back out of the ring by the legs and pulls back his arm for the WMD punch ... Kofi ducks it though, Show wheels around and here comes Mysterio across the ring, he somersaults over the top rope and collides with the giant to take him down to the delight of the fans. Into the ring goes Kingston, he waits and waits ... TROUBLE IN PARADISE! KOFI CONNECTS WITH THE TROUBLE IN PARADISE KICK! Del Rio lands on the ropes, head exposed, set up perfectly ... Kofi realises this and he tags in Mysterio who milks the crowd reaction before hitting the ropes, here he goes looking for his big move, the 619 coming up ... Ricardo Rodriguez jumps up to protect Del Rio ... 619 FROM MYSTERIO TO RODRIGUEZ INSTEAD! Ricardo falls down after taking the 619 for his employer who realises what has happened and exits the ring before he can be caught once more. As he goes through the ropes, he tags in Big Show who is just getting back onto the apron and then he heads up the ramp with a look of resignation on his face. As the crowd boo, it becomes clear that Alberto Del Rio is leaving the match and a groggy Big Show, back inside the ring, now realises this. He tries to call Alberto back but his plea doesn’t work and Big Show looks annoyed with his partner. However, the delay is costly – Mysterio dropkicks Show in the lower back, Show falls down over the middle rope, here we go ... 619! MYSTERIO HITS THE 619 TO BIG SHOW! The crowd go wild as Show falls backwards into the ring, Mysterio leaps onto the top rope and springboards off towards Show as he gets up ... SPRINGBOARD LEG DROP! Show’s face is planted into the mat as Mysterio tags in Kofi once more. Kingston leaps into the ring and waits ... and waits ... TROUBLE IN PARADISE CONNECTS! SHOW IS STRUCK BY KOFI’S BOOT! Kofi makes the cover ...

** 1 **
** 2 **
** 3 **​

WINNER:
KOFI KINGSTON & REY MYSTERIO (9:32) via pinfall

The crowd erupt with delight as the referee counts 3 and Kofi and Rey embrace after a hard fought victory there. Show rolls out of the ring as Kofi mocks him and waves whilst Alberto Del Rio, joined by a groggy looking Ricardo Rodriguez, watches on from the stage with a look of anger in his eyes. Mysterio looks out towards him and dares him to come back to the ring and fight, Mysterio wants revenge on Del Rio more than anything it seems. However, Del Rio shakes his head and walks out of the arena leaving Mysterio and Kofi to celebrate their victory – a big victory as we edge closer and closer towards Elimination Chamber, particularly for Kofi Kingston. Grisham and Foley hype up the importance of the win to Kofi as he prepares to face Show in the Chamber and say that the momentum is with the Ghanaian as he approaches the World Championship opportunity in a couple of weeks time. The camera switches backstage once more and again we see Matt Striker as he is ready to interview somebody in the interview pit ...

 

[GCB]

(continued)​

MATT STRIKER:
Ladies and Gentlemen, my guest at this time ... World Heavyweight Champion ... CM PUNK!

A mixed reaction for Punk as he comes into shot, the World Heavyweight Championship draped over his shoulders. Punk looks conflicted still as he waits for the question ...

MATT STRIKER:
Punk, last week, we saw you in a dilemma about whether or not to pin Christian, a man who you say has earned your respect, on Michael Cole’s orders. Your thoughts?

Punk adjusts the title belt and considers his response for a minute ...

CM PUNK:
You’ve only got to look around the SMACKDOWN locker room at the moment to see people who are having a tough time of it thanks to Michael Cole – Christian, the Hardys, Kofi. They’re all struggling because Michael Cole won’t give them a break, because Michael Cole won’t treat them with respect. Like I said last week, I’m not out here to win popularity contests, I don’t care whether the WWE Universe cheer for me or boo me, I don’t care whether my opponents are bad guys or good guys, all I care about is CM Punk and this right here ... (Punk raises the title aloft) – the World Heavyweight Championship. When I won this two months ago, I vowed that I would fight anybody and I vowed that I would hold this title for an awful long time. When somebody is on a roll and deserves a shot, I wanna’ face them and see what they’re made of. When I faced Christian at the Royal Rumble, I found out what a tough guy he is to beat and I only won that match because he passed out from the Anaconda Vice.

Punk shakes his head a little and considers his words carefully again.

CM PUNK:
There are a lot of people around here in the WWE that don’t like me, hell, there are a lot of people here in the WWE that I don’t like either. They don’t understand me, they don’t agree with my choices, that’s fine, I don’t expect them to. I do expect that people treat others with the respect that they deserve. At the Rumble, Christian earned my respect whereas Michael Cole didn’t. Michael Cole thought that I was just another guy he could mould to do his bidding, just like John Cena. Michael Cole was wrong ... until last week.

Punk looks troubled here ...

CM PUNK:
Last week, the SMACKDOWN G.M. found a way to force me to do his bidding for him. That match last week was unfair, it was a load of crap but Cole ordered the match and there was nothing I could do. I sure as hell wouldn’t wanna’ retain my title because of Michael Cole but I sure as hell don’t wanna’ lose my title because of Michael Cole either. So last week, whether I liked it or not, I had to hit the GTS to Christian, I had to make the pinfall on him and I had to end his dream of competing at the Elimination Chamber for this title.

Punk looks directly at the camera now.

CM PUNK:
Very clever, Michael Cole. Very clever indeed. But let me tell you something, Mr. General Manager. I’m no sheep, I don’t go blindly along with things because they’re easy. I’ve had time to reflect on what I did last week and I’ve come to the conclusion that I could have done things differently. Michael Cole, you believe your own hype, you think you’re the greatest General Manager of all time because of what? Because John Cena won the Rumble? Because you made a match people wanna’ see? That doesn’t make you great, Cole, that makes you somebody who is doing his job. I don’t agree with how you’re doing it but that’s what you’re doing. So, from now on, I will do my job. I can be just as clever as you can, Cole, more so in fact, I know how I can out-smart you. I won’t be taking the easy options no more – because I’m the World Champion. I’m just doing my job.

Punk turns to walk away but he stops short – the camera pulls back to reveal Christian stood facing him. The World Champion nods his head slightly to Christian who steps up to the microphone himself as Striker holds it ...

CHRISTIAN:
Just for the record, Punk, I don’t blame you for what you did last week. Like you say, you’ve gotta’ do what you’ve gotta’ do. I appreciate your words but let me tell you this. Tonight, I face Cena one on one and I will get the win I need to head to the Elimination Chamber. And when I get there, I am going to beat you and take your World Championship. I just thought you’d better know that.

Punk and Christian lock eyes but Christian then offers his hand out to Punk. Punk hesitates for a moment and then shakes it – respect, indeed.

CM PUNK:
You believe that if you want to, Christian. I hope you do beat Cena tonight, I wanna’ prove to the world that I CAN beat you. I got a feeling you will win tonight ... Good luck.

Punk turns and walks away as the camera focuses on Christian as he watches the World Champion as he leaves before SMACKDOWN heads into another commercial break ...

*** COMMERCIAL BREAK ***​

SMACKDOWN returns from the commercial with Tony Chimel in the ring, he announces that the next match is an Elimination Chamber qualifying match for an opportunity to earn a spot in the World Championship match. There are loud cheers around the Wells Fargo Arena as the WWE Universe prepare for one of the big matches of the night that Michael Cole announced earlier ...

*** LIVE FOR THE MOMENT ***

*** MATT HARDY ***​

The first of the two Hardy brothers heads out and it is the older brother, Matt. The crowd give him a huge cheer as he comes out and salutes the fans with his V1 symbol before he heads for the ring looking pumped up and determined. As he approaches the ring, Hardy slaps hands with members of the WWE Universe before he slides under the bottom rope and jumps up in the corner to salute the fans some more. Grisham and Foley discuss the heartache that Matt went through during his time on SMACKDOWN over the past few months when he was chasing the World Championship and getting further and further away. Foley praises Matt’s brother Jeff for making him realise that this wasn’t just about the World Championship and says that Matt now seems happy again as he prepares for this match. The arena goes quiet before the arrival of Matt’s opponent begins ...

*** NO MORE WORDS ***

*** JEFF HARDY ***​

Here comes the younger Hardy, the controversial Jeff Hardy. Jeff dances around on the stage as the lights flash purple and white before he makes his way towards the ring at a run. He slides into the ring as well and jumps straight up on the ropes and salutes the fans with a Hardy pose before jumping down and facing his brother – Foley says that Jeff has had the top championships in the WWE and knows how it feels – unlike his brother. Grisham suggests that Jeff has the know-how more than Matt and that he could be the bigger danger to CM Punk’s title at Elimination Chamber ... The two brothers touch hands to show their friendship and respect before the referee rings the bell and this match can get underway ...

SINGLES MATCH – ELIMINATION CHAMBER QUALIFIER
JEFF HARDY vs. MATT HARDY

The two brothers circle each other in the early going as they look tentative about fighting each other. Eventually, the pair of them lock up in a high elbow tie up and they grapple, both trying to get the upper hand, but it comes to nothing and they end up releasing each other. This follows twice more with no results before Matt suddenly rounds Jeff and looks to surprise him with a leg takedown; however, Jeff counters this and rolls it through into a surprise early roll up ...

** 1 **
** 2 **
** MATT SPRINGS OUT! **​

As the pair of them get back up, Jeff winks at Matt and the pair of them resume their early exchanges as they look to get on top. Matt finally does manage to take Jeff down but this just leads to a series of pinning predicaments with both men reversing them easily until the pair of them release and get to their feet. Jeff takes the chance to hit a low drop kick to the chest of Matt, the first real move of any note, and then he goes on the attack with Matt a little shocked from it. Jeff hits a snap suplex to Matt and then comes off the ropes to hit a double leg drop over the chest of his brother before he makes the cover ...

** 1 **
** 2 **
** MATT KICKS OUT! **​

As the pair of them get up, Matt is quicker and he takes his chance to hit a quick DDT to Jeff before he considers his next move. Matt speeds off into the ropes and comes off them just in time to catch Jeff with a running forearm before he drops down to make a cover of his own, he hooks the leg of his brother ...

** 1 **
** 2 **
** JEFF KICKS OUT! **​

Matt locks the leg scissors in around the waist of Jeff and he twists to keep Jeff down on the mat in the hold. The referee is asking Jeff if he wants to give up but there is no chance of that and Jeff, still fresh, manages to prise Matt’s legs away from his waist and then shoves him away before jumping up and coming off the ropes looking for another drop kick to Matt who is down low. However, Matt manages to avoid the contact and Jeff ends up crashing down to the mat near the ropes. As he looks to get up, he uses the ropes to pull himself up and Matt, noticing a chance, hits a high knee to back of his brother that sends him toppling between the ropes and down to the outside with a thud. The referee tells Matt to step back and he begins the countout on Jeff who gets back to his feet on the outside and looks up to Matt with his arms spread as if he is asking Matt why he did that. Matt looks amazed that Jeff is making an issue of this and stands his ground as a more fired up Jeff returns to the ring and he shoves Matt hard in the chest. Matt looks a little shocked but he shoves Jeff back hard in the chest and actually succeeds in sending Jeff down to one knee. The crowd become more excited now as the two brothers are starting to feel it more and they stand close to each other whilst talking a little trash. Jeff again shoves Matt who responds with a right hand and the match is now finally going to get going! The two brothers trade blows and it gets a little messy but the increase in aggression has made this match far more entertaining now. It is Matt who gets the upper hand from the flurry of rights as he manages to force Jeff back and the whips him to the corner of the ring. He rushes over for a clothesline but Jeff ducks it and Matt collides with the buckles before Jeff hits a dropkick that sends Matt tumbling through the ropes as well. The crowd are on their feet now as they try to pick which of their favourites they will cheer for here, Matt staggers up on the outside as Jeff comes balancing on the top of the barricades around the corner of the ring ... Clothesline from Jeff to his brother Matt who goes down hard on the outside now. The referee comes out and orders Jeff to get back into the ring whilst Matt recovers ...

When both men return to the ring, you can see that both now desperately want to win this one – not for the right to challenge for the title but because they want to get one over on the other. The match swings both ways as Matt and Jeff both have periods where they take over control of the contest but then a counter or a reversal follows and the control changes once more. The match is even until Jeff hits the first big move and counters Matt’s whip to the corner with the Whisper in the Wind that sends Matt down hard to the mat. Jeff makes the cover ...

** 1 **
** 2 **
** MATT KICKS OUT! **​

Jeff grabs Matt by the hair now and drags him up, the brotherly love between these two is out of the window, before he strikes him with right forearms to the face in the corner. This time, Jeff whips Matt into the corner before following up with an attempted clothesline – Matt avoids it and Jeff eats the buckles, Matt hits a clothesline on Jeff in the corner instead before hitting a big time Bulldog that drives Jeff down into the canvas. Matt is rallying here and he is clearly feeling it – fired up, ready to explode – as he waits for Jeff to get to his feet. Here he comes ... SIDE EFFECT! MATT HITS JEFF WITH THE SIDE EFFECT! It’s over now! Matt hooks the leg ...

** 1 **
** 2 **
** NOOOO! JEFF KICKS OUT! **​

Matt holds his head in his hands as he kneels at the side of his brother and he wonders about what he is going to need to do to defeat him. Jeff rolls away, wincing a little in pain, as Matt gets to his feet and waits again ... Is Matt preparing for the Twist of Fate? Jeff gets to a knee as Matt continues to stalk him and goes for it, he locks Jeff in a headlock and signals for the Twist of Fate but Jeff shoves him away at the last moment instead ... Springboard clothesline from Jeff Hardy! Matt lands sat in the corner of the ring and Jeff sees his chance here. He uses the ropes for momentum and crashes his feet into the chest of Matt as he is sat in the corner causing his brother to cry out in anguish and roll out of the corner clutching his shoulder. Jeff spots his chance now and he quickly ascends the ropes and stands looking down on Matt who is rolling on the mat ... SWANTON BOMB! MATT ROLLS OUT OF THE WAY AT THE LAST SECOND! Jeff collides hard with the mat and he has hurt himself there as he clutches his back and rolls in pain but what resourcefulness from Matt as he avoids the finishing move of his younger sibling. Matt steps back and waits for Jeff to get up ... TWIST OF FATE! MATT HARDY HITS THE TWIST OF FATE! Matt makes the cover and hooks the leg of Jeff ...

** 1 **
** 2 **
** 3 **​

The crowd erupt but then the referee notices something ... No! Jeff had his foot on the rope! The referee waves off the pinfall and Matt looks on in disbelief! He can’t believe it and complains to the referee as Grisham and Foley introduce a replay of it on TV – yes, it’s right, Jeff got his foot on the bottom rope at 2 and a half. Matt cannot believe this but he is forced to accept that the match isn’t over as he surveys the situation. Jeff is pulling himself up in the corner and the look of anger on Matt’s face is worrying as he heads over towards him. As Jeff gets to his feet in the corner, Matt stands up on the ropes and mounts him before delivering right hands to the face of Jeff. Some of the crowd are booing here but Jeff responds by grabbing Matt’s legs and trying to carry him from the corner. Matt grabs the turnbuckle and holds himself there, he clearly prefers being in the ascendency here and doesn’t want to be slammed down by Jeff. As Jeff tries to drag Matt and himself across the ring, Matt stubbornly holds onto the top turnbuckle until ... it suddenly rips off and both Hardys fall messily to the mat. Matt angrily throws the turnbuckle pad down and goes to strike Matt again, Jeff counters with a Mule Kick that staggers Matt backwards ... BAM! Matt’s head collides with the exposed steel turnbuckle, totally accidental on Jeff’s part who was unaware the pad had even been removed. As Jeff recovers, Matt slumps in the corner clutching the back of his head in pain from hitting the steel. As Jeff comes around, still none the wiser about Matt’s ‘headache’ he prepares to fly across the ring. As Matt gets groggily to his feet in the corner, Jeff hits a flying clothesline that staggers Matt some more as he comes out of the corner. Jeff positions his head under Matt’s jaw ... Jawbreaker! Matt slumps to the mat in pain here, his jaw and the back of his head troubling him. With Matt grounded, Jeff seizes his chance and quickly goes to the top rope once more ... SWANTON BOMB! JEFF HITS THE SWANTON BOMB! Is it over now? Jeff makes the cover ...

** 1 **
** 2 **
** 3 **​

WINNER:
JEFF HARDY (8:48) via pinfall

Controversy here as Jeff celebrates the win in the corner with his fans cheering for him – Foley calls it immediately and says that Matt’s foot was on the ropes as well. Replays show this is true as Matt complains to the referee but the referee refuses to change his mind and he holds up Jeff’s hand to signal that he is the winner and he is the man heading for Elimination Chamber. Jeff looks at his older brother with a smile and offers a handshake that Matt, feeling bitter right now, shakes his head to and he exits the ring instead. Matt continues to berate the official and begs him to look at a replay but he isn’t going to – the result stands. Jeff salutes the fans in the ring as Foley and Grisham discuss his chances in the World Championship match in two weeks time – can Jeff Hardy win the World Championship? Just as Foley is suggesting why Jeff, seen celebrating on screen, is a danger ... BAM! STEEL CHAIR SHOT TO THE BACK OF JEFF HARDY!

The camera zooms out and reveals Matt Hardy is back in the ring and clutching the steel chair that just connected with his brother with a look of complete conflicting emotion on his face. As he stands looking down on Jeff, Matt throws the chair down and drops to his knees beside him. Matt is now checking on his brother! What is going on here with Matt? Matt looks appalled at what he has just done but then stands up with his head in his hands. Matt’s face changes back to anger and he looks down on his brother again with a look of justification. His brain twisted here, Matt decides to exit the ring and leave and he heads up the ramp shaking his head to himself. At the top of the ramp, Matt looks back and peers into the ring at his brother who is clutching his back in pain ... What was Matt Hardy thinking there?

*** COMMERCIAL BREAK ***​

SMACKDOWN returns with a replay of the ending of the match before the break as Jeff Hardy controversially defeated his brother Matt and claimed one of the remaining spots in the SMACKDOWN Elimination Chamber match for the World Championship in two weeks time. We then see the chair shot from Matt and the conflicted emotion he showed afterwards – anger at Jeff and the referee over the result, remorse for Jeff as he realised what he’d done to his little brother. As the replay ends, Jeff is shown being helped backstage by the doctors before the camera switches to Matt in the locker room who is hastily packing his bag – he looks as if he is leaving SMACKDOWN for the night. As Matt turns to leave though, Michael Cole, the SMACKDOWN General Manager walks in. He is smiling and he holds his hand up to tell Matt to stop.

MICHAEL COLE:
Well, well, well, Matt. Who would have thought you were capable of that?

Hardy looks unimpressed with Cole’s words and he shakes his head at the General Manager rather than dignify him with a response. Cole laughs at him.

MICHAEL COLE:
Let’s be honest here, Matt, you and I don’t get on. I appreciate that. You don’t like me, I don’t particularly like you. However ...

Matt looks at Cole threateningly and causes him to pause ...

MICHAEL COLE:
... However, Matt, I was impressed with what I just saw. For the last five years, you have been treading water here in the WWE and doing nothing. You’ve been missing that fire in your belly that you need to be a success. Tonight, just then, I saw it.

MATT HARDY:
That out there, Cole, was a mistake ...

MICHAEL COLE:
That out there, Matt, was a true way forward for you. That’s a Matt Hardy that I can get behind. That’s a Matt Hardy that impresses me. I’m the man in charge of Friday Night SMACKDOWN, you need me onside, Matt. Think about it.

Cole pats Matt on the shoulder and then heads out of the locker room leaving Matt to ponder the words of the SMACKDOWN General Manager before the camera switches back to the ring where Tony Chimel announces that the following match is for the Tag Team Championships!

*** BOURNE TO WIN ***

*** EVAN BOURNE & MARK HENRY ***​

The challengers for the Tag Team Championship head out into the arena to a good reception from the Iowa crowd who are completely behind them in their quest to win the Tag Team Titles tonight. Bourne salutes the crowd and runs down to the ring as Henry, the powerhouse of the team, menacingly makes his way to the ring, a look of focus on his face. In the ring, Henry salutes the crowd with a wave as Bourne jumps up on the ropes to do so as Grisham and Foley speculate over how much of a challenge Bourne and Henry will provide for the Empire tonight ...

*** RULE BRITANNIA ***

*** MASON RYAN & WILLIAM REGAL – THE BRITISH EMPIRE ***
(w/Finlay) | Tag Team Champions​

With Finlay waving the Union Jack and leading them out, Ryan and Regal head out dressed in red, white and blue trunks and with the Tag Team Championship belts strapped around their waists. Regal is also wearing a overcoat that shows his class as they head for the ring – Regal is waving and taunting the crowd but Ryan looks focused as Henry did moments ago. The three of them head up the ring steps into the ring where Finlay waves the Union Jack to a chorus of boos and jeers whilst the referee takes the title belts away from the champions. Finlay makes his way out of the ring and Foley stresses his hope that Finlay stays out of this one; Grisham doubts there is any chance of that one as Finlay is shown placing the flag and his shillelagh down on the top of the steps. It looks as if Regal and Henry will be starting the match as the referee holds up the Tag belts and then signals for the bell to start this championship match ...

TAG TEAM CHAMPIONSHIP MATCH
MASON RYAN & WILLIAM REGAL (c) (w/Finlay) vs. EVAN BOURNE & MARK HENRY

The match starts out well for the challengers as Regal’s technical wrestling fails to take Henry out of the game and he responds with a huge belly to belly suplex that nearly drives the Englishman through the mat. Henry looks to be dominating from this point as he drags Regal around the ring and hits a number of big moves – the Military Press Drop being the one that leaves Regal in danger in the middle of the ring. Henry goes for a cover but Regal manages to wriggle clear instead and he heads for the corner where he tags in Mason Ryan. Ryan comes in and faces Henry and there is a buzz around the arena as the two big men stare each other out. It is Ryan that breaks the staredown as he tries to catch Henry off guard with a right hand but Henry is unfazed and responds with a forearm to the face of his own before he mows into Ryan with a shoulder to the chest that knocks Ryan off his feet, no mean feat. Angered, Ryan rushes at Henry for a clothesline attempt but Henry scoops him off his feet and hits a huge Side Slam that crashes Ryan down to the mat as well. Cover from Henry on Ryan ...

** 1 **
** 2 **
** RYAN KICKS OUT! **​

Stunned, Ryan staggers back and Henry’s attention is drawn elsewhere – Finlay is taunting him from the apron where he has just jumped up. As the referee demands Finlay get down, Mason Ryan takes advantage with a poke to the eye of Henry before he follows up with a clothesline that rocks the big man. Henry tags in Bourne as he clutches his face and he leaps up onto the top rope quickly, springboards towards Ryan and looks for a Hurricanrana takedown. However, Ryan is too strong and he catches Bourne coming and he drops him onto the top turnbuckle face first before mowing him down with a clothesline. Dragging Bourne to the corner of the ring where Regal is stood, he immediately goes to work punishing Bourne as the champions now look to cut the ring in half and keep Bourne over on their side of the ring. Frequent tags between Ryan and Regal keep Bourne down and when Regal signals that it is time for the Regal Stretch, things seem bleak for Evan. However, Bourne is nothing if not resilient and he manages to get to the ropes and fight his way to breaking the hold before he manages to hit a series of kicks to Regal to create some space. He springboards off the ropes and hits a dropkick to Mason Ryan as he watches on that knocks him down to the mat and then he makes his way over towards Mark Henry, can he make the tag? Yes he can! However, the referee hasn’t seen it as he was dealing with Finlay who was on the mat – when the ref turns around, he orders Henry back out of the ring. Henry argues and this gives Regal time to drag Bourne out of their corner and he hits him with a suplex before tagging in an angry Mason Ryan. Into the ring comes the Welshman and he immediately sets Bourne up for a Powerbomb to finish the match right here ... Up goes Bourne who then manages to come around and he counters into a Hurricanrana that drives Ryan down into the mat. Bourne makes the tag to Henry!

Henry comes in and barges through Ryan as he gets to his feet before he squashes Regal in the corner as well! Ryan tries to run at him but Henry catches him coming and scoops him up ... WORLD’S STRONGEST SLAM! HENRY SLAMS RYAN DOWN TO THE MAT! Are the titles about to change hands here? Regal makes a distraction but Henry again shoves him through the ropes before he makes the pinfall on Ryan ... New Tag Team Champions?

** 1 **
** 2 **
** RYAN BARELY KICKS OUT! **​

The delay caused by Regal saves the titles for the Empire – for now! Henry looks unfussed though and he looks down on Ryan and he smirks before hitting the ropes ... BIG SPLASH! HENRY SQUASHES RYAN AGAIN! Henry makes the tag to Evan Bourne and the crowd get to their feet now in excitement ... Bourne climbs the ropes and surveys the position of Mason Ryan who is down and out and in place ... Bourne springs off the top rope ... 450 SPLASH! Nooooo! At the last moment, Regal drags Ryan out of the way and makes the save, Bourne eats the mat! The referee ushers Regal away as Henry starts to come into the ring, the referee isn’t watching ... BAM! Flagpole shot to the back of Henry as he tries to get into the ring, he slumps down on the ring apron and then falls to the floor as the jeers ring out around the arena. Ryan is up before Bourne ... POWERBOMB! MASON RYAN WITH THE POWERBOMB ON BOURNE! It’s over! Ryan makes the cover but it is surely academic ...

** 1 **
** 2 **
** 3 **​

WINNER:
MASON RYAN & WILLIAM REGAL (5:06) via pinfall

Another controversial Tag Team Championship defence for the champions who defeat Bourne and Henry with a little outside help from Finlay, the crowd are not happy but that doesn’t worry the Tag Team Champions. They taunt the crowd as Bourne and Henry stagger away and Regal grabs the Union Jack and waves it in the air. He is delighted to have retained the titles, that is clear, he hands the flag back to Finlay and demands a microphone.

WILLIAM REGAL:
That is why we are the most dominant tag team in the WWE, that is why we are the most dominant Tag Team Champions of all time!

Heat for Regal as he tries to claim that they dominated that match when they were, in actuality, lucky to retain and thankful to outside help from Finlay!

WILLIAM REGAL:
We beat Ryder and Hawkins so badly that they’ve split up, we’ve now beaten Bourne and Henry once more, we’re the Tag Team Champions that you should be proud of. Stand up! Stand up, Iowa! Show some respect for the Tag Team Champions ...

Huge heat now as Regal’s demands are not followed by the crowd who prefer to boo and jeer them instead ...

WILLIAM REGAL:
There isn’t any other team in the WWE that can compete with the British Empire! We will be Tag Team Champions forever! You’d better all start giving us the respect that ...

*** BRINGIN’ DA HOOD T U ***

*** CRYME TYME ***​

Huge cheers from the WWE Universe as Cryme Tyme head out onto the stage – Grisham immediately reminds us that at the Royal Rumble, somebody took out these two men and prevented them from appearing in the Tag Team Turmoil match where the British Empire won the Tag Team Championships. Foley laughs at the word ‘somebody’ before declaring that it was obviously the Empire who did it. JTG and Shad bound around on stage and then they stand at the top of the ramp and stare down to the Empire who are stood in the ring looking at them shocked. Their music fades though and silence falls for a second before ...

*** NEW FOUNDATION ***

*** HART DYNASTY ***
(w/Natalya)​

With pink lights flashing around the arena, out come David Hart Smith and Tyson Kidd to a huge reception and they also stand at the top of the ramp with Cryme Tyme looking down at the ring where the Empire are stood. It seems that Regal’s comments have annoyed two tag teams here in the WWE – Grisham also reminds us that at the Rumble, the Empire attacked the Dynasty when Regal and Ryan distracted the referee during their entrance – and Finlay snuck in and attacked both Harts with the Union Jack leaving Kidd as easy pickings for Regal when he entered the ring. The Hart Dynasty and Cryme Tyme look to each other and then they all start rushing down the ramp towards the ring towards the Empire. Fearing the worst, Regal, Ryan and Finlay take their title belts and their flags and they exit the ring and clamber over the barricades as JTG, Shad, Kidd and Hart Smith enter the ring and chase them down. The Empire are on the run and it is clear that there are two teams here who are desperate for the chance to shut them up once and for all ...

The cameras switch from the Harts and Cryme Tyme in the ring and they head to Matt Striker in the interview pit.

MATT STRIKER:
Ladies and Gentlemen, please welcome ... CURT HAWKINS!

Hawkins comes into view as Striker holds the microphone ...

MATT STRIKER:
Curt, last week on SMACKDOWN, you were involved in a match with your former Tag Team partner, Zack Ryder ...

A replay comes on showing the arrival of Jack Swagger during the match to attack Ryder and seemingly side with Hawkins rather than Hawkins face Ryder one on one in a fair contest ...

MATT STRIKER:
My question to you, Curt, why didn’t you fight Zack one on one?

Hawkins looks annoyed with Striker’s question and he grabs the microphone from him and shoves him aside. He turns to the camera to address the WWE Universe ...

CURT HAWKINS:
Striker, shut your mouth before I shut it for you. Let me tell you something, I don’t mind facing Zack Ryder one on one, I know I would beat him. But you see, I wanted to make a statement. For weeks now, I have been growing sick and tired of being overlooked here in the WWE. Even when I was a Tag Team Champion, I was overlooked, it’s ridiculous. Ryder and I came back into the WWE, we took the Tag Team Championships away from those idiots Santino and Kozlov and then Zack changed. He began to worry about what you guys thought. He began to worry about entertaining all of you rather than what was important – our Tag Team Championships.

Hawkins shakes his head as he remembers ...

CURT HAWKINS:
So we got to the Rumble and everybody was asking “Will Hawkins and Ryder hold on to their titles?” when the truth was, the question they should have been asking was ... “When will Zack Ryder screw up and cost Curt Hawkins the Tag Team titles?”

Boos around the arena for Hawkins’ comments ...

CURT HAWKINS:
Deep down, I went out to the ring at the Royal Rumble and I knew we weren’t going to win. I knew that screw-up Ryder would mess things up and I knew we’d be losing the titles. And what do you know? We did lose those titles and we failed to regain them on NXT. So I started looking around. I wanted a new partner, I wanted somebody the complete opposite of Ryder, somebody I could trust to care only about winning. And I found that man ... Come on, man.

Into the shot walks the All American American Jack Swagger who is smirking as he comes into shot ...

JACK SWAGGER:
For months now, I have been under-used here in the WWE and it is time for all of that to end. All of you people should recall that less than a year ago I was the All American American World Heavyweight Champion, the greatest World Champion of all time. It is time for Jack Swagger to head back to the top of SMACKDOWN, to the top of the WWE. I’m going to start by joining with Curt Hawkins who has the same philosophy as me. I will not change my style for all of you, I am not interested in entertaining all of you, I am only interested in ... winning.

Swagger looks to Hawkins who nods his head in agreement and claps his new partner on the back ...

JACK SWAGGER:
Zack Ryder is an idiot, he is a guy that will pander to all of you, he wants you to watch his silly little YouTube show, he wants you be his ‘Broski’ and he wants to entertain you? I don’t see it that way, Ryder, I see it that it is time for Jack Swagger ... and my new partner, Curt Hawkins ... to clean up SMACKDOWN and the WWE of people like you. And I will start that clean up right here ... tonight!

Boos for Swagger as he tosses the microphone aside and then laughs with Hawkins as they exit the interview area and the camera returns to the ring. The crowd pops as the music of the afore mentioned Ryder begins ...

*** RADIO ***

*** ZACK RYDER ***​

It seems that Ryder’s popularity with the WWE Universe is growing and he heads to the ring with a smile on his face as he greets the fans in the rampway. However, it is clear that Ryder is still annoyed over last week’s events when he gets into the ring and points backstage to show that he can’t wait to get Hawkins or Swagger out here tonight and teach them a lesson.

*** GET DOWN ON YOUR KNEES ***

*** JACK SWAGGER ***
(w/Curt Hawkins)​

Hawkins is accompanying the All American American as he makes his way out into the arena and completes some push ups on the stage before heading for the ring with a determined look on his face. Grisham and Foley discuss Swagger’s reasons for joining forces with Hawkins and Foley suggests that Swagger should be concentrating on himself rather than finding a like-minded individual to support him. However, Swagger heads to the ring with Hawkins and they clearly won’t care about Mick Foley’s opinion as they enter the ring. Ryder warily looks over to the two of them; he knows that he needs to be careful whilst it is two against one. The referee orders Curt Hawkins out of the ring and then signals for the bell and the start of the match. Grisham hypes up the match and questions whether or not Ryder can get some revenge when SMACKDOWN returns from the commercial break ...

*** COMMERCIAL BREAK ***​

 

[GCB]

(continued)​

SINGLES MATCH
JACK SWAGGER (w/Curt Hawkins) vs. ZACK RYDER

SMACKDOWN returns partway into the match and we see that Swagger is in control here as he has Ryder under his control. Swagger is taunting Ryder and is slapping him around the head as he steps away from him, Ryder is struggling. Grisham throws to a replay where we see that during the break, Swagger avoided the Broski Boot and then rammed Ryder shoulder first into the ring post. As the replay disappears, we see Ryder is favouring his left shoulder and is really struggling with it. Swagger drags Ryder to his feet and he twists the injured arm around and we see some anguish on the face of Ryder but he tries to fight back with kicks to the quads of Swagger. The All American releases Ryder who continues to fight back with right hands before hitting the ropes to attack Swagger some more ... Swagger catches him though and hits a Tilt-a-whirl slam that crashes Ryder down to the mat hard. Swagger makes the cover ...

** 1 **
** 2 **
** RYDER KICKS OUT! **​

Swagger gets to his knees and locks in an Armbar on Ryder’s hurt arm as he tries to wear him down in the centre of the ring. Ryder is desperate to get to his feet or to the ropes but Swagger is using his considerable power advantage to keep the leverage over Ryder and keep him down on the mat struggling. Hawkins taunts Ryder from the outside of the ring and says out loud “Is this entertaining enough for you, Zack?” before laughing. However, this seems to inspire Ryder a little and he begins to force himself up whilst a chant begins in the arena of ‘Let’s go, Ryder!’ that also fires him up some more. Ryder reaches his feet and forces Swagger back to the corner before Swagger counters by whipping him across the ring to the opposite corner. As Swagger rushes over, Ryder jumps up and gets his knees into the face of Swagger to knock him back to the delight of the crowd. A flying forearm follows from Zack and he manages to create a gap between him and his opponent before catching Swagger as he comes flying towards him again with a flapjack that crashes the All American down into the mat face first. Swagger rolls to the corner and sits against the bottom buckle, perfect set up ... BROSKI BOOT! Ryder hits a stiff boot to the face of Swagger and makes the cover ...

** 1 **
** 2 **
** SWAGGER KICKS OUT! **​

Ryder is disappointed but he is on a roll now. The crowd are right behind him and Swagger is slowly getting up as Ryder moves back waiting ... Ryder runs over towards Swagger and looks to hit the Rough Ryder but he fails as Swagger swats him away. Still stunned, Swagger turns back towards Ryder again but a drop kick from Ryder sends him down again. Zack goes to get Swagger once more but this time he is distracted by his former partner, Hawkins. Zack and Hawkins have a war of words and it proves enough as Swagger rolls Ryder over and has him in place ... ANKLE LOCK! SWAGGER APPLIES THE ANKLE LOCK TO RYDER! Zack yells in pain before desperately trying to reach the bottom rope. The crowd urge him on as Hawkins taunts him from the outside, Ryder stretches and pulls and inches towards the ropes ... However, he just can’t stand it no longer and with half a metre still left to go ...

** TAP **
** TAP **
** TAP **​

WINNER:
JACK SWAGGER (6:43) via submission

Boos echo around the arena as Hawkins leaps into the ring and raises Swagger’s arm in victory. Ryder is down in the corner clutching his ankle whilst Swagger celebrates. Curt can’t resist though and he flies over at Zack and begins pounding away at him. Right hands rain down on the head of Ryder who is completely loopy and then Hawkins drags him over and feed him to Swagger again ... Jack is only too willing to lock on the Ankle Lock once more despite the protestations of the referee and he wrenches Ryder’s ankle in the hold as Zack yelps in pain. Hawkins is enjoying this but the crowd are booing. Eventually, the referee threatens Swagger with a reversal of the decision and he releases Ryder – nothing is more important than winning! Ryder is down on the mat in pain and Hawkins spots his chance ... He heads for the top rope ... HEAT SEEKING ELBOW FROM HAWKINS TO RYDER! Boos erupt again around the arena as Swagger and Hawkins head through the ropes with a smirk on their faces, Ryder is beaten down and helpless in the ring.

*** COMMERCIAL BREAK ***​

SMACKDOWN returns with a replay of the confrontation earlier tonight between Christian and Michael Cole in the ring where we see Christian letting everybody know that he is entitled to a one on one Elimination Chamber qualifying match and Michael Cole slapping him across the face before announcing that his opponent will be John Cena ...

*** MY TIME IS NOW ***

*** JOHN CENA ***
(w/Michael Cole)​

Huge boos around the arena as John Cena heads out onto the stage and he stands at the top of the ramp with a smirk on his face at all the hate he is receiving. Cena waves his hand in front of his face as he tells the Iowa crowd that they “can’t see” him before he beckons back to the backstage entrance and out walks the SMACKDOWN General Manager. If possible, there is even more heat for Cole who is despised by the WWE Universe and he shakes Cena’s hand and follows him towards the ring. Cena jumps into the ring whilst Cole makes his way around it and joins Todd Grisham and Mick Foley at the announce table, obviously Cole is ready to call the end of Christian’s time here on SMACKDOWN ...

MICHAEL COLE:
You gentlemen don’t mind if I join you, do you?

TODD GRISHAM:
Course not, welc ...

MICHAEL COLE:
Shut up, Grisham. I’m the General Manager around here, if I want to come out here and announce a match, I will do. Just remember that I am still the greatest announcer in WWE history even if I am busy with other things nowadays. How are you doing, Mick?

Foley raises his eyebrows at Cole on camera and doesn’t respond. Cole shrugs his shoulders ...

MICHAEL COLE:
An announcer that refuses to speak? OK then, maybe that is something I should consider in your next job evaluation!

In the ring, Cena is taunting the crowd and getting prepared for this match, a huge match tonight for Christian as he looks to secure a place not only in the Elimination Chamber but also in the SMACKDOWN locker room!

MICHAEL COLE:
What a night it has been so far, Jeff Hardy has earned his place in the SMACKDOWN Elimination Chamber match, Matt Hardy has finally woken up and done something entertaining, the Empire have defended their Tag Team Championships, that goofball Ryder has been taken out, we’ve still got the Buried Alive match to come and right now it is time for Christian to lose his job here on SMACKDOWN!

MICK FOLEY:
You know, Cole, I wouldn’t count your chickens just yet. Christian is one tough ...

MICHAEL COLE:
Did I give you permission to speak to me, Foley? Just remember – I’m your boss.

*** JUST CLOSE YOUR EYES ***

*** CHRISTIAN ***​

MICHAEL COLE:
Did you see the look on Christian’s face when I slapped him earlier? Boy, that felt good!

Out comes Christian with a look of determination in his eyes, he heads for the ring knowing that this could be the most important match of his WWE career so far. On one hand, he could be taking a significant step towards the World Championship, on the other hand, he could be taking his final step out of the SMACKDOWN door ...

MICHAEL COLE:
Here is a man that tonight, when he loses to John Cena, will be leaving SMACKDOWN for good. Maybe I should give him Shawn Michaels’ number as he leaves? I hear RAW can always use another loser!

Christian steps into the ring and he stares down at Cole on the announce table, he clearly wants to head out there and take revenge on Cole for slapping him earlier tonight. However, he knows he has to focus on his match, his chance to beat Cena and head for the Elimination Chamber in two weeks time for a shot at the World Championship.

MICHAEL COLE:
That’s right, Christian, you stay up there where you’re safe. You don’t want none of Michael Cole!

Foley snorts as he laughs and this causes Cole to angrily turn to face him ...

MICHAEL COLE:
Is something wrong, Foley? Like I told you earlier, I am your boss now and I can fire you along with this no good loser in the ring if you would like?

The referee checks on Cena and Christian before he heads over towards the timekeeper, he is ready to signal for the bell to ring when all of a sudden ...

*** THIS FIRE BURNS ***

*** CM PUNK ***
World Heavyweight Champion​

MICHAEL COLE:
What the hell is he doing here?

A mixed reaction for Punk again, it seems that many people are cheering him after his recent defence of Christian and his right to be in the Elimination Chamber match. Punk has the World Championship strapped around his waist and both Cena and Christian look surprised to see him as he struts down the ramp towards the ring. He reaches the foot of the ramp and pauses as he looks up at both Cena and Christian before heading around the ring and also joining the announce table for this match!

MICHAEL COLE:
Punk, I have not given you permission to be out here!

CM PUNK:
Hello there, Michael Cole. How are you doing, sir?

Cole blusters for a moment and looks angrily at his World Champion.

MICHAEL COLE:
You do realise that I ...

CM PUNK:
SMACKDOWN General Manager, yadda yadda, your boss, yadda yadda. Change the record, Cole, I know damn well who you are. But you seem to be forgetting who I am. (Punk holds up the title belt) I’m YOUR World Champion, Cole, that means that I can go where I want, when I want. Now shall we get on with watching this match?

Foley nods his head to Punk and the referee appears to agree as well as he signals for the bell so that the match can begin ...

SINGLES MATCH – ELIMINATION CHAMBER QUALIFIER (If Christian wins, he qualifies. If Christian loses, he is fired)
CHRISTIAN vs. JOHN CENA

As the match begins, the WWE Universe break out the chant of ‘Let’s go, Christian! Cena sucks!’ as Cena and Christian circle each other. Michael Cole applauds Cena and gives him encouragement from the announce table, he clearly trusts Cena to get the job done tonight and ensure that Christian is fired from SMACKDOWN later tonight. The two men in the ring tie up and Cena displays his undoubted power as he shoves Christian over to huge boos from the crowd. Cena smirks at them and beckons to Christian to get back up and fight. Christian does exactly that and the pair of them grapple once more, this time Christian spins round the back of Cena, arms around his waist, German Suplex from Christian! Cena’s shoulders are down ...

** 1 **
** 2 **
** CENA KICKS OUT! **​

First move goes to Christian but Cena isn’t happy over that and he rushes Christian immediately after and hits him with a clothesline that knocks Christian down to the mat. The Canadian gets up quickly but Cena takes control here as he hits an Atomic Drop and follows it up with another clothesline before making his first cover of the match ...

** 1 **
** 2 **
** CHRISTIAN KICKS OUT! **​

With the match heading under the control of Cena, Michael Cole begins to get mouthy again on commentary ...

MICHAEL COLE:
Christian has no chance here tonight, Punk. He’s in the ring with the man who won the 2011 Royal Rumble, he’s in the ring with the man who I believe will go to WrestleMania 27 and beat the World Champion, whoever that may be, he is the greatest WWE superstar to ever set foot here on SMACKDOWN, end of discussion.

CM PUNK:
You really believe that, Cole? Wow, you’re even more stupid than I thought you were.

Back in the ring, Cena is now dominating Christian as he hits a Belly to Belly suplex that crashes Christian down to the mat – Cena is controlling this and Christian appears, with the stakes so high, to be freezing. Cena lifts himself up onto the middle rope and he surveys Christian for a moment before leaping off and connecting with a punch to the face of the Canadian before he makes another cover and hooks the leg ...

** 1 **
** 2 **
** CHRISTIAN POPS A SHOULDER OUT! **​

Cena is beginning to get a little over confident here though and it shows when he delays by mocking the crowd only to then fail when he goes for a Bulldog moments later. As he comes off the ropes, Christian looks dazed but as Cena goes for the Bulldog, Christian is able to avoid it and he grabs Cena and tosses him over the top rope causing Foley to suggest that it is a pity Christian didn’t do that two weeks ago to eliminate Cena from the Royal Rumble and spare them all the build up to Cena going to WrestleMania 27. With Cena down outside the ring and Cole looking hesitant for the first time tonight, Christian heads out and goes to ram Cena into the ring steps, however, Cena reverses it and it is Christian that crashes into them instead. Big mistake from Christian there as SMACKDOWN heads into a commercial break once more ...

*** COMMERCIAL BREAK ***​

As SMACKDOWN returns, Grisham brings us up to date with Cena and Christian back in the ring. A replay of Cena attempting to hit the FU to Christian on the outside of the ring is shown but Christian countered by wriggling clear and running Cena head first into the ring post instead and we have now got Christian on the offensive in the ring. Christian whips Cena to the ropes and as he comes back, Flapjack! Cena’s head bounces off the canvas and the man fighting for a chance to go to the Elimination Chamber looks over to Cole.

MICHAEL COLE:
The fact of the matter is this – Christian has only minutes left of his career here on SMACKDOWN. If I were him, I wouldn’t be in the ring fighting a losing battle for a chance at the World Championship. I’d be out here on my knees in front of the General Manager begging for my job.

CM PUNK:
The ‘Michael Cole Kiss-my-ass’ club? Original.

Christian continues on the attack against Cena, he catches Cena with an inverted DDT as he misses with an elbow strike, Christian hooks the leg and makes the cover ...

** 1 **
** 2 **
** CENA KICKS OUT TO THE RELIEF OF COLE! **​

As both men get to their feet, Christian is quicker and he springboards off the ropes into a dropkick that knocks Cena back down to the mat. Quick as he can, Christian climbs the ropes and dives off into a Crossbody. However, Cena manages to catch him and displays great strength as he readjusts Christian in his arms and then drops him in a Sidewalk Slam that crushes Christian down to the mat instead. Cover from Cena this time and he decides to put his feet up on the ropes for extra leverage here as well ...

** 1 **
** 2 **
** CHRISTIAN KICKS OUT! **​

The crowd saw Cena using the ropes and they jeer him for it but the Royal Rumble winner isn’t bothered by that. Cena ducks under a clothesline from Christian and then hits his patented shoulder blocks ... one, two, three of them as the crowd rise to their feet and boo Cena’s actions. Cole stands and applauds Cena as he looks excited that this could be the end of the match and Cena follows up the shoulder blocks by lifting Christian up and dropping him on his back, Protoplex! The WWE Universe know what is coming next and, on cue, here comes Cena with the Five Knuckle Shuffle. He comes off the ropes, waves his hand across his face to all four sides of the arena as well as CM Punk at ringside before trying to drop it to Christian ... Christian stuns Cena with a quick, surprise roll up, could this be a shock win?

** 1 **
** 2 **
** CENA KICKS OUT JUST IN TIME! **​

Cena puffs out his cheeks as he gets up, avoids the right hand thrown by Christian and hip tosses him over onto his back once more. With Christian in a sitting position, Cena hits the ropes and hits a low drop kick before he stands over Christian once more, waves across his face and connects this time, Five Knuckle Shuffle. The crowd are jeering Cena but he doesn’t care, he wants to prove his loyalty to Michael Cole right here, he wants to take Christian out of the SMACKDOWN picture and he wants to pick up momentum as he heads for the Elimination Chamber clash with Randy Orton. With Christian down on the mat, Cena decides it is time for a submission hold and he drops down on top of Christian and locks in the STFU hold. STFU FROM CENA! Will Christian be able to hold on? Cena wrenches back on Christian but the Canadian, importantly, gets his foot loose quickly from the position in which Cena tried to lock it in. Christian uses both feet to push himself towards the ropes, can he make it? YES! Christian reaches the ropes and forces the break. Cena isn’t impressed and he drags Christian back to the centre of the ring and looks to lock in the STFU once again, this time, though, Christian is able to tug at Cena’s arm and send him sprawling over the middle rope. Christian baseball slides out of the ring and connects with a hard, right hand to Cena’s face and sends him backwards clutching his nose. Christian slides back into the ring and, as Cena gets up, springboards up and over him, Sunset Flip into a pinning combination ...

** 1 **
** 2 **
** CENA KICKS OUT! **​

Both men get up at the same time now and they begin trading heavy, right hands back and forth, the crowd are cheering Christian’s shots and jeering Cena’s. This time, Christian gets the better of it but Cena counters with a whip to the corner. As Cena follows in, Christian hits a Pendulum Kick around the ropes and Cena staggers back into the centre of the ring. On his back, Cena is in trouble as Christian climbs the ropes, could it be time for a Frog Splash? No, Cena rolls out of the ring to Cole’s relief but this doesn’t deter Christian and he leaps from the top rope to the outside of the ring instead and hits a beautiful Plancha that takes Cena down to the floor hard. Cole leaps to his feet nearby and he berates Christian but the Canadian laughs at him and shoves him back down into his chair at the announce desk. Looking confident now, Christian rolls Cena back into the ring and then follows, as soon as he does though, Cena hits a kick to the gut and lifts him to his shoulders, FU? No! Christian wriggles clear and sets for the Killswitch instead. Cena counter and shoves Christian away into the corner of the ring, his chest colliding with the buckles. As Cena approaches him again though, Christian hits a stiff back kick to the knee of Cena and then a clothesline to knock him down to the mat before springboarding off the ropes and knocking Cena down with a shoulder block. Quickly, Christian ascends the ropes, Cena is down and out on the mat ... FROG SPLASH! CHRISTIAN CONNECTS WITH A FROG SPLASH! Has he just earned his place in the Elimination Chamber World Championship match?

MICHAEL COLE:
No, no, no, kick out, Cena! Kick out!

** 1 **
** 2 **
** NO! SO CLOSE! **​

A chant of ‘Christian! Christian!’ goes up in the arena, the WWE Universe are firmly behind him here as he looks to inflict Cena’s first defeat since the Rumble. Christian again looks to hit the Killswitch but Cena counters with a suplex that puts Christian down and allows him time to recover a little, a great defensive move from Cena. The Rumble winner stands back and waits for Christian to get up before hitting another combination of shoulder blocks and then another Protoplex before Cena heads for the top rope ... Leg Drop to the back of Christian’s head and shoulders. Cena makes the cover ...

** 1 **
** 2 **
** CHRISTIAN KICKS OUT! **​

MICHAEL COLE:
Come on, John, it’s time to put this idiot out of his misery once and for all!

Cena steps back and he beckons for Christian to get to his feet as he waits and waits behind him, stalking his prey, ready to strike. The crowd are screaming for Christian to realise what is coming but he groggily gets up to his knees with no sign that he is aware that Cena is waiting to pounce ...

MICHAEL COLE:
This is it, Punk. The end of your new best friend, Christian is out of here in just a few ... Wait, where are you going?

CM PUNK:
Do you think I’m going to stay sat here all night, Cole?

Punk winks at Cole and then throws his headset at him before he slides into the ring, dropping the World Championship on the way, and stands up in front of Christian as he gets up. The referee orders Punk to get back out of the ring whilst Cena looks at him and prepares for a fight. However, Punk does the one thing that nobody expects him to do – as Christian gets up to his feet, Punk clotheslines him and knocks him back down to the mat as everybody in the arena stares stunned at what they’ve just seen. Cena looks confused towards Punk who shrugs his shoulders and winks at Cena, the referee has no choice ...

** THE REFEREE SIGNALS FOR THE BELL TO DISQUALIFY JOHN CENA! **​

WINNER:
CHRISTIAN (9:36) via disqualification

Punk leaves Christian and heads over to the ropes where he stands staring down at Cole and Cena who has exited the ring – he taps his head and laughs as it becomes clear what has happened here ...

TONY CHIMEL:
The winner of this match, as a result of a disqualification, and qualifying for the Elimination Chamber match ... CHRISTIAN!

Realising what CM Punk has just done, the WWE Universe cheer loudly whilst Cole and Cena look on in anger. Christian has qualified for the Elimination Chamber thanks to CM Punk! Cole looks stunned by this and he throws the headset down in temper before storming off around the ring and up the ramp. Cena looks on at Punk who now holds up the World Championship to mock Cena who shakes his head and begins to walk away. Punk laughs and then turns to Christian with the title still held high. Christian and Punk are speaking in the ring even though we can’t hear it. Clearly, Punk is telling him that he has gotten him a shot at the title, now he has chance to prove that he can win it. Christian nods his head and there is a look of respect between the pair of them as the camera follows them out of the ring ... Grisham and Foley laugh about the look on Michael Cole’s face when he stormed off at the end before Grisham hypes up our main event match tonight – a Buried Alive match between Kane and the Undertaker. Foley says it is too close to call and with the spot in the Chamber up for grabs, both of these men will pull out all the stops tonight to try and make sure that they get the victory that they need. Grisham throws out to a video outlining the issues between these two men in their WWE careers ...

[YOUTUBE]TDr3Np2UCf4[/YOUTUBE]
GCB NOTE: Ignore the bit about the World Championship!

*** COMMERCIAL BREAK ***​

 

[GCB]

(continued)​

SMACKDOWN returns with Michael Cole in his office with the phone glued to his ear looking agitated ...

MICHAEL COLE:
What do you mean? That can’t .......... No, you gotta’ listen to me .......... Wait .......... Christian won the match on a disqualification, that isn’t allowed .......... What do you mean? He didn’t win the match fairly and .......... But CM Punk .......... Wait .......... NO! NO! Are you there?

Cole listens but it appears that the Board of Directors representative he was seemingly on the phone to has hung up on him. He angrily throws the cellphone across the room and it crashes against the wall before he sits down with his head in his hands looking devastated with how things have turned out. The camera switches back to ringside where we see the mound of earth stocked up and the gravestone on top of it as Grisham reminds us of the current Elimination Chamber line-up – World Champion CM Punk is defending against Big Show, Kofi Kingston, Jeff Hardy, Christian and the winner of the next match, the Buried Alive match between Kane and the Undertaker. Foley says he cannot wait and then the lights go out and it is time for the main event ...

*** SLOW CHEMICAL ***

*** KANE ***​

With eerie red lights in the arena, out walks the demented younger brother, the self proclaimed ‘Devil’s Favourite Demon’, the Big Red Monster ... Kane. He stops on the ramp and looks across at the mountain of earth and then heads over towards it and picks up a handful of dirt with a look of a madman about him. He turns and heads for the ring laughing to himself as he gets boos from the WWE Universe who really want to see Kane defeated tonight. Stood in the centre of the ring, Kane raises his hands high and then drops them ... BOOM! The lights return as the ringposts explode in red flame, Kane’s trademark entrance is still amazing even now. Walking around the ring and talking to himself, Kane appears to be crazy as he prepares for this match tonight and he waits ...

... and waits ...

... and waits ...

... ‘Un-der-ta-ker!’ is the chant from the WWE Universe ...

... and Kane waits and waits ...

... and then, to the sound of huge cheers, the lights go out again and the arena is plunged into darkness!

*** GONG ***
*** GONG ***
*** GONG ***

*** GRAVEYARD SYMPHONY ***

*** THE UNDERTAKER ***​

The awesome entrance of the Undertaker begins as fires burn on the stage, dry ice fog covers the arena floor and the blue, purple and silver lights flash around the stage as the Deadman returns to SMACKDOWN ready for action once more. After his last match at the Rumble, Taker has not been seen but he is here tonight with a chance to earn a spot in the World Championship match at the Elimination Chamber – what a fantastic opportunity this is. As the Phenom appears on the stage, creeping through the shadows, the crowd go wild with delight to see him and Grisham reminds us that Undertaker will be out for revenge after Kane’s assistance in his elimination from the Royal Rumble by John Cena. Taker slowly approaches the ring where Kane is waiting for him, he stops on the ring steps and he raises his hands high to bring back the lights. Standing outside the ring, Taker locks eyes with his demented brother, Kane, and steps through the ropes into hell. Removing his coat, the eye contact between the two will not break until Taker removes his hat ... The thunder sounds echo around the arena as he rolls his eyes back but then Kane attacks him and the match is under way as the bell is rung on the referee’s instruction ...

BURIED ALIVE MATCH – ELIMINATION CHAMBER QUALIFIER
KANE vs. THE UNDERTAKER

Kane’s sneak attack to start the match gives him the upper hand in the beginning as he thunders right hands into the face of Taker. However, the Deadman looks determined to punish Kane here tonight after all he has put him through over the past year and he cuts Kane off and starts to deliver a huge set of right hands of his own. Kane is wobbling already as the right hands continue from Taker, they’re absolutely smashing down into the head of Kane who tries to cover up and protect himself. The fans are on their feet for this fast start as Undertaker steps back a moment before clotheslining Kane up and over the top rope. The Big Red Monster lands on his feet but wobbles on the outside, Undertaker has him in trouble early here with this quick start. Taker stalks after his little brother and slams his head hard into the ring steps, not once, but twice, Kane’s bald head smashes into the steps with a crash. Kane tries to get away but he can’t and Taker spins him round before whipping him into the steps this time, BAM! Kane hits the steps with a ferocious smash and they come loose with the impact. Undertaker looks down on Kane as the crowd cheer for him, what a start from the Phenom of the WWE. Dragging Kane up again, Undertaker again slams Kane’s head into the steps and then into the ring post, he seems intent on destroying him here. Into the ring rolls Kane, trying to escape, Taker follows him in. A kick to the gut from Kane slows Undertaker for a moment but then Kane misses with a clothesline and Taker hits a series of choke thrusts that stagger Kane back to the corner. Taker whips Kane over to the opposite corner and then follows in ... Clothesline! Another whip to the original corner ... another Clothesline! Kane staggers away and Taker hits the ropes ... Big Boot to the face and Kane is sent crashing down to the mat as the cheers erupt around the arena.

Kane is groggily getting to his feet, he doesn’t know what has hit him so far. Taker grabs his arm and twists it around, the crowd cheer and shout “Old School” as Taker winds it up before stepping to the corner. He climbs to the top turnbuckle and then, balancing precariously, he walks along the top rope before dropping a heavy right arm across the back of his brother, Kane. Staggering to the corner on his hands and knees, Kane looks shocked and Taker stomps the hell out of him in the corner, turning back the clock to his glory days, forcing Kane under the bottom rope for safety and respite. As Kane props himself against the announce table, Undertaker hits the ropes opposite and comes running over ... He leaps over the top rope and flies into the Big Red Monster and the pair of them crash over the table and scatter the chairs and the announcers. “Holy s**t!” is the response of some of the crowd, this is amazing from Undertaker so far here on SMACKDOWN. As the camera finds a way to get closer to the two brothers, we see Undertaker is pummelling the face of Kane over and over on the floor where the chairs once were. Taker steps out from behind the desk and is greeted by a huge cheer from the crowd, Foley is watching on with a look of awe in his eyes, he knows what this type of match with Undertaker is like and he comments that he has never seen the Undertaker this dominant in a Buried Alive match before. Kane crawls over the table and Undertaker goes to deliver more right hands but Kane has a plan – he pokes Taker in the eyes and this buys him a little time. Taker wobbles away a little before turning back towards the Big Red Monster ... BAM! TV MONITOR TO THE SKULL FROM KANE! Undertaker drops down to his knees clutching his face, what a resourceful move from Kane there to stop the momentum of the Deadman.

Kane regains his composure a little and takes time to recover. Once he is ready, he stalks up behind Taker and, when he turns around, he delivers some heavy right hands of his own. Finding their target, Kane’s right hands are doing some damage but not enough ... Undertaker responds with rights of his own and forces Kane back again. Kane looks a little desperate and whips Taker to the barricades where he hits his back hard. However, when Kane rushes at him looking to knock him over the barricades, Taker moves, allows Kane to collide with them and then clotheslines him over them instead. Kane staggers to his feet in amongst the crowd now and tries to put distance between himself and Taker, the Deadman follows through the sea of people here for SMACKDOWN tonight. Kane stumbles into the technical area and Taker follows where he corners him against some steps. Right hands from Taker rain down on Kane’s skull over and over, Kane cannot get into the match at all. Taker drags Kane up and slams him into crates and audio speakers, mixing in more right hands, the crowd around them cheering him all the way. Kane cannot get any offence in and his only hope appears to keep moving. Taker follows him through the crowd and then grabs him near the barricades further around the ring near the aisle. He tosses Kane over them and steps over himself – completely in control. As Kane props himself against the ring post, Undertaker reaches under the ring and pulls out a steel chair! Kane is unaware of what Taker has in his hand and he goes to slam it into his back ... BING! Kane moves at the last second and Taker smashes the chair into the post instead, Kane throwsa punch, Taker ducks and then jams the chair into the stomach of Kane.

The chair is tossed by Taker over the top rope and into the ring, he obviously has further plans for it. He rolls Kane into the ring under the rope but keeps his head hanging over the edge of the ring apron, we know what is coming here! Up onto the apron goes Undertaker, he runs along the edge of the ring ... Hanging Legdrop! Kane clutches his throat as Taker rolls back into the ring with the cheers ringing in his ears. What a performance this is proving to be from the Deadman! After all his injuries and disappearances of late, he is back even more dominant than ever before! In the ring, Taker grabs the chair once again but Kane sees him and makes a quick exit under the ropes, out of the ring he goes with Taker in pursuit. Kane steps over the barricades once more but Taker grabs him and drags him back towards him, right hand in retaliation from Kane! Taker staggers and Kane puts some distance between them as he makes his way through the WWE Universe and starts up the steps. Taker is following again though, Kane sees him and he throws another right hand, another brawl begins in the crowd between these two. Once again, Undertaker comes out on top of this fistfight and then he drags Kane back towards the ring instead and throws him over the barricades once more. Kane crawls into the ring and Taker follows up the ring steps taking a breath as he does. Into the ring goes Taker, Kane is down but he does get hold of the chair as Taker approaches him ... BOOM! Kane rams the chair into the mid-section of the Deadman who doubles up a little, Kane stands up quickly and raises the chair ... BAM! CHAIR SHOT TO THE BACK OF UNDERTAKER! BAM! Another shot to the back from Kane! BAM! And another! Kane has got a leveller right here, no disqualification, this is perfectly legal! As Taker falls to his knees, Kane comes off the ropes and hits a boot to the face of Taker to knock him onto his back. Kane has wrestled the control away from Undertaker and – just like that – he is dominating.

Kane picks up the chair once more and he props it up over the throat of Undertaker, choking him with the chair legs, willing him to give it up, willing him to lay down, willing him to die. Kane is maniacal, he looks possessed by evil as the veins in his head throb, Taker is writhing in pain under the steel, his throat jammed with the chair. Kane starts to stomp away at Undertaker before he jams the chair into his stomach once more, this is what Kane knew he would have to do tonight. BAM! CHAIR SHOT TO THE BACK OF TAKER! Kane looks around at the WWE Universe and smirks now, he tosses the chair away and sets himself, holding his hand up behind him ... Up staggers Undertaker ... CHOKE SLAM! KANE CHOKE SLAMS UNDERTAKER! The crowd boo but Kane has laid out his brother although, as Grisham reminds us, he’ll need more than that to incapacitate the Undertaker enough to bury him alive. Kane stands over Taker and yells at him, “I told you to stay away, Deadman!” he yells, before stepping back again as Taker groggily rolls over and gets slowly back up ... CHOKE SLAM! ANOTHER CHOKE SLAM FROM KANE! Undertaker is laid out on his back, if this was a normal match, it would be over and Kane would be getting the 1, 2, 3! However, it isn’t a normal match, the only way to win is to bury your opponent alive. Kane smiles an evil smile and he drags Taker, wobbling on his jelly legs, up once more ... Kane looks at him with an evil smirk and then sets up ... TOMBSTONE PILEDRIVER! KANE TOMBSTONES UNDERTAKER! Taker’s head bounces off the mat and Kane stands over him and laughs.

Now Kane’s problem is how will he get the Phenom from the ring to the grave? He begins to drag Taker’s dead weight out of the ring but it is taking time. Once he has Taker out of the ring, Kane lifts him up onto his shoulder and he slowly carries him up the aisle towards the mound of earth waiting for him. Almost at the top of the ramp, Kane drops Taker on the metal floor and takes a breather as he looks up to the top of the mound, about six foot high, and wonders how to get Taker up there. Kane takes a deep breath and goes to drag Taker up once more but Taker has recovered a little and he grabs Kane’s throat and tosses him from the ramp to the hard floor below. A desperate counter move from Undertaker there! Both men need time to recover and replays of some of the action so far are shown as they do – Foley says that whoever wins this will definitely be one of the favourites in the Elimination Chamber. As both men get to their feet, Undertaker jumps down off the ramp and joins Kane on the concrete floor and they begin to trade blows once more. Over and over, taking longer and longer, they throw right hands at each other, the crowd cheering Taker and jeering Kane. In the end, Undertaker, with his tenth punch of the trade, starts to overpower Kane and he has chance to deliver a number of rights to Kane. Kane is looking to escape now and he climbs the mound of earth, the WWE Universe come alive as Taker follows, we’re getting to the really exciting part now! Kane desperately throws a punch at Taker but he misses and Undertaker grasps him by the throat ... Choke Slam into the grave? NO! LOW BLOW FROM KANE! A desperation move and the crowd boo him for it but Kane does not care at all. Taker sinks to his knees and Kane spots his chance and delivers a Big Boot to the face and Undertaker falls to the earth.

This is Kane’s chance, you sense that he needs to put Taker away and quickly. Kane approaches Taker looking tired, looking desperate, looking battered and bruised. As Kane goes to drag Taker towards the hole in the mound, Taker delights the fans here in Des Moines as he sits up with a bulging look in his eyes, he is frothing at the mouth as he stares right through Kane. HELL’S GATE! TAKER LOCKS IN HELL’S GATE ON KANE! Kane is desperately trying to escape but there is nothing that he can do, Taker wrenches it in further and further and punishes Kane for everything he has put him through as Kane teeters close to the edge of the six foot drop beside him. Kane’s desperate, panicking movements start to subside and he seems to be passing out here as Taker wrenches at the Hell’s Gate hold more and more. Kane’s arm goes limp, he has passed out but Taker continues to hold it. Eventually, the Phenom is satisfied that Kane is finished and he releases the hold to huge cheers from the WWE Universe. Taker looks down on Kane’s lifeless, limp body laid beside the hole and he cuts his throat – it is time to be buried! Undertaker drops to his knees and rolls Kane with all his might ... KANE FALLS INTO THE GRAVE!

CAN UNDERTAKER NOW BURY KANE ALIVE? ​

The cheers and shouts of the WWE Universe are so loud here, they seem to pick up as Taker moves around towards the mound of earth beside the grave. He goes to pick up a shovel, Grisham tells us he needs to completely cover Kane’s body with earth. A shot inside the grave shows us that Kane is still lifeless, this match is surely over?

BAM!

SHOVEL SHOT TO THE BACK OF UNDERTAKER’S SKULL!

WHAT THE HELL?! ​

Spoiler

JOHN CENA? Why is Cena out here? Why has he just clobbered Undertaker with a shovel? Undertaker is on his knees, in pain from the shot from behind, he gets slowly to his feet and turns around to see who attacked him ... BAM! ANOTHER SHOVEL TO THE SKULL FROM CENA! Undertaker goes down this time clutching his head and Cena stands over him. He raises the shovel again and starts to smash it down over and over again into the stomach of Undertaker, the crowd are booing, there is so much heat for Cena right now! What is he doing? Foley reminds us that Cena eliminated Undertaker from the Rumble with help from Kane, is this payback for Kane’s assistance? Cena’s shots with the shovel seem to have done the trick and he throws the shovel away with a look of madness in his eyes. Cena waits as Undertaker starts to get to his knees, what is he going to do now? Up gets Taker, slowly, he turns ... FU! CENA WITH THE FU!

UNDERTAKER LANDS IN THE GRAVE WITH KANE! ​

The crowd gasp in horror! What has Cena just done? He has just hit the FU to Undertaker and dropped him down six foot into the grave where he has landed on top of Kane! Cena looks around as he is hit with mega heat from the crowd, then Cena looks down at the shovel. A thought passes through his mind and he picks the shovel up ... What the hell is Cena doing now? He starts shovelling dirt into the grave and he starts covering both Undertaker and Kane! Is Cena going to bury both of the brothers alive?

No. Kane is moving, Kane is getting up and he sees what Cena is doing. He doesn’t look impressed as he scrambles his way out of the grave and Cena drops the shovel and starts to back away, his hands raised up to Kane as if to apologise. Kane stalks towards him and Cena backs down the mound of earth and onto the stage. Kane is after him and Cena decides to get the hell out of here. Kane is on stage and Cena is gone ... Kane turns to look back to the digger and the mound of earth where Undertaker is laid in the grave. He laughs and smiles, he raises his arms as he looks up at the digger with the bucket of earth hanging over the grave. Kane drops his arms and everybody expects to see the dirt fall into the grave ...

DARKNESS! ​

The lights are off and nothing is visible here. The fans cheer, is this a sign that Taker is fine? On come the lights again and Kane looks mystified as he looks around the stage. He drops down to the floor and scrambles up the mound of earth, the camera follows him as he reaches the top and looks down into the grave where his brother is ... is ... is ... gone! Where has the Undertaker disappeared to? Kane blinks and can’t believe it. He rubs his eyes leaving streaks of earth over his face and looks again. No Undertaker! Where on earth has he gone?

GONG!

THE LIGHTS GO OFF AGAIN! ​

The WWE Universe here are cheering and screaming as they await the return of the Deadman ...

GONG!

THE LIGHTS RETURN! ​

Kane is now stood back on the stage looking around paranoid. The camera shows that there is still no sign of the Undertaker in the grave and we see Kane looking round desperately, he doesn’t know where Taker is.

GONG!

LIGHTS OFF ONCE MORE! ​

What the hell is happening here? Classic Undertaker mind-games as the WWE Universe cheer and shout ...

GONG!

THE LIGHTS RETURN! ​

Kane is still looking around, he looks terrified as he stands on the stage looking around desperately. The WWE Universe start to go wild though, they see what Kane can’t as Undertaker climbs out of the grave and down the mound of earth, sneaking up behind Kane. The Big Red Monster gets a look of terror on his face as he realises that somebody is behind him ... he turns ... CHOKE SLAM! ON THE STEEL STAGE! Kane’s body is writhing in pain, Taker has smashed it down hard onto the steel. The crowd know what is coming next too, they are going crazy now as Taker cuts his throat once more! He drags Kane up, lifts him up ... TOMBSTONE PILEDRIVER! KANE IS TOMBSTONED ON THE STAGE! Kane’s lights are completely out, Taker has him beat now surely! Kane is dragged up by Taker, he drags his brother down the ramp, over the concrete floor and up the mound of earth, there are no signs of life in Kane! Undertaker drops Kane down at the side of the grave, he waits and looks down on Kane who is showing a flicker of life as he moves a little ... Taker waits ... Kane rolls over and starts to get up to his knees ... Taker waits ... Kane is up to one foot ... Taker waits ... Kane is on two feet, wobbling, spins around ... CHOKESLAM! INTO THE GRAVE!

CAN UNDERTAKER BURY KANE ALIVE? ​

The crowd are cheering for Taker as Kane is shown down in the grave, his body smashed down at the bottom, six foot under and knocked out cold. Taker looks up at the bucket of the digger, full of earth, he raises his hands up high and a lightning bolt crashes down from the roof of the arena ... The bucket tips over and the earth falls out and down into the grave covering Kane and filling it up. Undertaker watches at it covers his brother ...

** UNDERTAKER BURIES KANE ALIVE! **​

WINNER:
THE UNDERTAKER (14:39)

As the Undertaker’s eerie music begins to play once again, the crowd go wild as Taker stands tall on the top of the mound of earth, the grave now filled with dirt from the bucket of the digger stood beside it and the battered body of his brother, Kane. As Taker looks down on the grave and the stone, he rolls his eyes as Grisham reminds us that this victory now means that Undertaker will join CM Punk, Big Show, Kofi Kingston, Jeff Hardy and Christian in the SMACKDOWN Elimination Chamber match where the World Championship will be up for grabs. Foley says that those five guys need to be on red alert now that Undertaker is in the match – who would bet against him winning? He also suggests that John Cena might not be sleeping too easy in his bed tonight after his attempt at interfering in the match. Taker drops to his knee on the bank of mud, the lights dim once more and the titantron comes alive with the words REST IN PEACE, KANE and Undertaker cuts his throat into his own pose. With the crowd cheering, SMACKDOWN fades away for another week.

*** END OF SHOW ***

=========================================

ELIMINATION CHAMBER 2011
*** CONFIRMED MATCHES ***

GRUDGE MATCH
John Cena vs. Randy Orton

SMACKDOWN ELIMINATION CHAMBER MATCH FOR THE WORLD CHAMPIONSHIP
CM Punk (c) vs. Big Show vs. Kofi Kingston vs. Jeff Hardy vs. Christian vs. The Undertaker

RAW ELIMINATION CHAMBER MATCH TO DETERMINE #1 CONTENDER FOR WWE CHAMPIONSHIP AT WRESTLEMANIA 27
Daniel Bryan vs. Kurt Angle vs. The Miz vs. Sheamus vs. ??? vs. ???

WWE CHAMPIONSHIP
Wade Barrett (c) vs. John Morrison

DIVAS CHAMPIONSHIP
Maryse (c) vs. Layla vs. Michelle McCool (?)

*** SUNDAY 20TH FEBRUARY LIVE AND EXCLUSIVE ON PAY PER VIEW ***​

​

 

[georgelfc123]

Well, here's my review GCB!. Been looking forward to this all week!

Good promo by Michael Cole to start the show, and great way to get the announcers to hype tonight's show! I'm definitely into it, and all the matches are very unpredictable, so I will have alot of fun reading this show. Anyways, Christian interrupts a nicely written Michael Cole promo and they exchange word back and forth. Christian completely owns Michael Cole, and I'm starting to think Christian will gain a place in the Chamber, but John Cena is going strong at the minute, he's got a World Heavyweight Championship shot at WrestleMania, it'll be hard to have him lose to Christian as you have to have him booked strong going into WM, so this is another unpredictable match I am looking forward too. Michael Cole thinking he's some kind of tough guy is hilarious!

A great face promo by CM Punk, if he retains at Elimination Chamber, then I absolutely cannot wait for Punk and Cena at WrestleMania. I'm kinda thinking that you're turning CM Punk into his rebellious character again because he's really hating on Michael Cole recently.

It's time, and it's come pretty early aswell, I thought Jeff vs Matt would have the second main event just before Undertaker and Kane, but anyways, a nice way to start the show off. Been looking forward to this for the sole purpose to see if a heel turn will take place. I'm hoping Matt Hardy will win this because Jeff's been at the center of the 'Hardy' name and if Matt won and earned himself a place in the Chamber, and not Jeff, he'd really step it up a bit. It seems like an even match both Matt and Jeff getting close near falls at the start of this. You're really good at writing matches, GCB, this is actually really believable. The match continues, and yes! Matt gets the win...but Jeff's foot was on the rope, dammit. I know Jeff Hardy's going to win this now for the sole purpose of that, and I can smell a Matt Hardy heel turn now, and yes, a Swanton Bomb by Jeff Hardy and he wins. But Wait..Matt Hardy's foot was on the rope, oh dear, I can see him costing Christian his match tonight against Cena, if it does happen, I do not know. Jeff offers a handshake, Matt says no. Yup, I smell a heel turn, andhere it is! Matt Hardy strikes Jeff in the back with a chair, saw that coming but nice way to write it, GBC. Matt then seems sorry..then angry..then sorry, LOL, wtf's happened to Matt Hardy? He's going insane haha. Anyways, great match GCB!

Awesome segment with Matt Hardy and Michael Cole with Cole trying to turn Matt into a fully fledged heel, Matt's saying it's a mistake but I think this is just a slow heel turn. Cole makes me laugh, one minute he hates Matt, the next he's kissing his ass, that's a true cowardly GM.

Fantastic Tag Team match, GCB. I had a feeling we'd be seeing new Tag Team Champions but that was not-to-be here. But you're doing really well with getting this British group over, and when they finally go their seperate ways hopefully they can go onto do bigger things.Especially William Regal, he's a brilliant wrestler.

Great match between Jack Swagger and Zack Ryder, these two have got potential togo far in you're BT, and if you keep booking them in matches like this, I can see them earning Championship opportunities to the US, Intercontinental Title etc. and this is what both men need, but I could see Swagger and Hawkins becoming Tag Champs. Great ending, but the Ankle Lock was too much for Ryder, and I understand as that move is deadly. I've had my brother lock it in on me for a couple of seconds, and I was in pain for the next two hours haha. Great match and a good win for Jack Swagger.

John Cena's alliance with Michael Cole is pretty good and it's getting Cena far as a heel.Michael Cole going back to his old job for a second and with him on commentary, he's going to get involved in this match, and he's GM. The ref can't overule him or anything, he can do whatever the hell he wants. And CM Punk comes out to even the playing field..I think. I see you've still got 'This Fire Burns' I like 'Cult of Personality' better but it doesn't really matter lol. CM Punk's sarcasm to Cole makes me laugh especially the, "Hello there, Michael Cole. How are you doing, sir?" line. Punk completely owning Cole on commentary it's hilarious. I'm pretty sure Michael Cole hated John Cena before he turned heel and now John Cena is apparently the greatest wrestler in the history of SmackDown, but Cole's just stupid lmao. Great match here, GCB, unpredictable, I don't want Christian to be fired but if he is, that means RAW and hopefully he could do big things there but I'm enjoying his role on SD at the moment. The bickering on commentary between Punk and Cole is very good and it's realistic aswell. Absolutely brilliant ending, GCB. Didn't expect that for a minute and I think this does solidfy CM Punk's face turn and I'm very happy about that also. Very smart by CM Punk and I wonder what Michael Cole's reaction to this will be as he;s been outsmarted once again.

So it seems as if Christian is in the Chamber and Michael Cole can't change it! Very happy about that, Christian is one of my favorites in this BT, and I actually think he's got a chance although I'm still thinking CM Punk will get the win and defend against John Cena at WM.

Great show, GCB. I enjoyed writing this review, and I thoroughly enjoyed your show. Very much looking forward to Elimination Chamber, and in the words of Good Ol' JR, it will be a slobberknocker!

 

[georgelfc123]

Well, here's my review GCB!. Been looking forward to this all week!

Good promo by Michael Cole to start the show, and great way to get the announcers to hype tonight's show! I'm definitely into it, and all the matches are very unpredictable, so I will have alot of fun reading this show. Anyways, Christian interrupts a nicely written Michael Cole promo and they exchange word back and forth. Christian completely owns Michael Cole, and I'm starting to think Christian will gain a place in the Chamber, but John Cena is going strong at the minute, he's got a World Heavyweight Championship shot at WrestleMania, it'll be hard to have him lose to Christian as you have to have him booked strong going into WM, so this is another unpredictable match I am looking forward too. Michael Cole thinking he's some kind of tough guy is hilarious!

A great face promo by CM Punk, if he retains at Elimination Chamber, then I absolutely cannot wait for Punk and Cena at WrestleMania. I'm kinda thinking that you're turning CM Punk into his rebellious character again because he's really hating on Michael Cole recently.

It's time, and it's come pretty early aswell, I thought Jeff vs Matt would have the second main event just before Undertaker and Kane, but anyways, a nice way to start the show off. Been looking forward to this for the sole purpose to see if a heel turn will take place. I'm hoping Matt Hardy will win this because Jeff's been at the center of the 'Hardy' name and if Matt won and earned himself a place in the Chamber, and not Jeff, he'd really step it up a bit. It seems like an even match both Matt and Jeff getting close near falls at the start of this. You're really good at writing matches, GCB, this is actually really believable. The match continues, and yes! Matt gets the win...but Jeff's foot was on the rope, dammit. I know Jeff Hardy's going to win this now for the sole purpose of that, and I can smell a Matt Hardy heel turn now, and yes, a Swanton Bomb by Jeff Hardy and he wins. But Wait..Matt Hardy's foot was on the rope, oh dear, I can see him costing Christian his match tonight against Cena, if it does happen, I do not know. Jeff offers a handshake, Matt says no. Yup, I smell a heel turn, andhere it is! Matt Hardy strikes Jeff in the back with a chair, saw that coming but nice way to write it, GBC. Matt then seems sorry..then angry..then sorry, LOL, wtf's happened to Matt Hardy? He's going insane haha. Anyways, great match GCB!

Awesome segment with Matt Hardy and Michael Cole with Cole trying to turn Matt into a fully fledged heel, Matt's saying it's a mistake but I think this is just a slow heel turn. Cole makes me laugh, one minute he hates Matt, the next he's kissing his ass, that's a true cowardly GM.

Fantastic Tag Team match, GCB. I had a feeling we'd be seeing new Tag Team Champions but that was not-to-be here. But you're doing really well with getting this British group over, and when they finally go their seperate ways hopefully they can go onto do bigger things.Especially William Regal, he's a brilliant wrestler.

Great match between Jack Swagger and Zack Ryder, these two have got potential togo far in you're BT, and if you keep booking them in matches like this, I can see them earning Championship opportunities to the US, Intercontinental Title etc. and this is what both men need, but I could see Swagger and Hawkins becoming Tag Champs. Great ending, but the Ankle Lock was too much for Ryder, and I understand as that move is deadly. I've had my brother lock it in on me for a couple of seconds, and I was in pain for the next two hours haha. Great match and a good win for Jack Swagger.

John Cena's alliance with Michael Cole is pretty good and it's getting Cena far as a heel.Michael Cole going back to his old job for a second and with him on commentary, he's going to get involved in this match, and he's GM. The ref can't overule him or anything, he can do whatever the hell he wants. And CM Punk comes out to even the playing field..I think. I see you've still got 'This Fire Burns' I like 'Cult of Personality' better but it doesn't really matter lol. CM Punk's sarcasm to Cole makes me laugh especially the, "Hello there, Michael Cole. How are you doing, sir?" line. Punk completely owning Cole on commentary it's hilarious. I'm pretty sure Michael Cole hated John Cena before he turned heel and now John Cena is apparently the greatest wrestler in the history of SmackDown, but Cole's just stupid lmao. Great match here, GCB, unpredictable, I don't want Christian to be fired but if he is, that means RAW and hopefully he could do big things there but I'm enjoying his role on SD at the moment. The bickering on commentary between Punk and Cole is very good and it's realistic aswell. Absolutely brilliant ending, GCB. Didn't expect that for a minute and I think this does solidfy CM Punk's face turn and I'm very happy about that also. Very smart by CM Punk and I wonder what Michael Cole's reaction to this will be as he;s been outsmarted once again.

So it seems as if Christian is in the Chamber and Michael Cole can't change it! Very happy about that, Christian is one of my favorites in this BT, and I actually think he's got a chance although I'm still thinking CM Punk will get the win and defend against John Cena at WM.

Great show, GCB. I enjoyed writing this review, and I thoroughly enjoyed your show. Very much looking forward to Elimination Chamber, and in the words of Good Ol' JR, it will be a slobberknocker!

EDIT: Damn, I wrote my Undertaker vs. Kane review on Word and it's disappeared. Anyways, i'll give you a short review over the match. I enjoyed it and when John Cena came out, I was shocked. Didn't have a reason to interfere :L, then he started trying to bury both men which made me laugh and then Kane got up. Cena runs off..exactly what I would do in thatsituation, then the gong and the lights go off. At this time, I didn't think anyone was going to be buried but then Undertaker tombstone's Kane, rolls him in and wins. Very muchlooking forward to the world title EC, it'll be unpredictable because anyone could win it! But it comes down to three men, Punk, Christian and Taker as they all have beef with Cena, who will most likely face the winner of that match at EC. Can't wait!

 

[Skairipa Matrix]

A Nightmare Review:

Alright GCB this is only my second time giving you some feedback but I try and follow whats going on somewhat.

Micheal Cole being Micheal Cole I thought maybe you were sending Christian to RAW with this stipulation but I was happy to see him win over Cena it was a nice victory.

The tag match with Del Rio didnt really do much for me honestly I just was kinda bored with it nothing against you just 3 out of 4 people in it I dont really care about in general.

Hmm Jeff winning with Matt's foot on the ropes? Im not sure how I feel about that it makes me think Matt might turn heel and somehow cost his brother the match at Elimination Chamber leading to a match at Wrestlemania and it's been done before I dont think doing it again would be any better.

Tag Title Match to me atleast was obvious who would win, But none the less it was still a good and entertaining match, Must say I never liked the team of Mark Henry & Evan Bourne though.

Onto the best match of the night the Buried Alive Match! They put on a frickin show together man Taker winning was a bit of a surprise but once Cena attacked I had a feeling Taker would win seems like were heading towards Undertaker vs John Cena at Wrestlemania which would be great.

Anyway great show GCB looking forward to Elimination Chamber to see how you do with the Chamber matches and looking forward to things being further set up for Wrestlemania!

 

[GCB]

*** PREVIEW ***
TARGET CENTER, MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA
MONDAY FEBRUARY 7TH, 2011

ORTON AND CENA HEADING FOR ELIMINATION CHAMBER!
After weeks, and months, of battles between the pair, John Cena and Randy Orton last week agreed – they would face each other one on one at the Elimination Chamber PPV in a battle to end the feud between the pair of them once and for all. With Cena desperate to concentrate on WrestleMania and his SMACKDOWN rivalries with most of the blue brand’s roster, he made the challenge last week when he visited RAW with the General Manager of SMACKDOWN, Michael Cole. In a shocking moment, Orton – unable to lay his hands on Cena as per the words of WWE owner, Chip Butty – RKO’d Cole to the delight of the WWE Universe to send a message to the Royal Rumble winner, Cena. However, there are sure to be consequences to Orton’s attack this week as Michael Cole has lodged an official complaint with Butty over the attack. Butty has already announced that both Orton and Cena will face ‘Pick your Poison Beat the Clock’ challenge matches on RAW and SMACKDOWN this week. Tonight, Cena will send one of the SMACKDOWN roster to RAW to face off against Orton. On Friday Night SMACKDOWN, Orton will send a member of the RAW roster to face Cena. The quickest winning time will result in that superstar choosing the match type for Cena and Orton’s clash at the PPV. Who will Orton face tonight? Can he get the win? And can he do it quickly?

JOHN MORRISON = NUMBER 1 CONTENDER!
After a hard fought battle last week, John Morrison managed to pin Kurt Angle and earned the right to challenge Wade Barrett for the WWE Championship in two weeks time at the Elimination Chamber event. Despite the claims of Wade Barrett that he will be a walkover, the popular Morrison is pumped up and ready for his shot at breaking out on RAW. Last week, Morrison claimed that Barrett did not deserve to be the WWE Champion and that he relied on Nexus to win him and retain him the WWE Championship. Barrett has not taken kindly to this and has responded on Twitter to these remarks:

@WadeBarrett
Morrison must be mad. I am the #WWE Champion because I am the best – not because of Nexus.

@WadeBarrett
@Justin__Gabriel: Beating you on #RAW last week proves that I am the better man. You won me the title? Ludicrous.

@WadeBarrett
#EliminationChamber will be the night that I prove that I am the #WWE Champion because I am the best.

Tonight, Morrison will be speaking out about his future WWE Championship match as he looks to show that he is worthy of a chance to challenge for the title. With Barrett annoyed with his comments, Morrison needs to keep an eye on his back – you never know when Nexus might be about to strike.

TWO SPOTS REMAIN IN THE RAW ELIMINATION CHAMBER MATCH!
Last week, Shawn Michaels and Chip Butty attempted to finalise the RAW Elimination Chamber match – the winner will challenge for the WWE Championship – whoever the champion is – at WrestleMania 27. However, at the end of the night, only four spots had been filled: The Miz, Kurt Angle and Daniel Bryan, as a result of losing the Fatal Four Way with John Morrison, took the first three spots whilst Sheamus earned his place in the match with a decisive victory over RVD. Edge and Chris Jericho’s qualification match ended in a No Contest when Edge attacked Jericho before the match began and hit him with a Spear before Jericho returned it with a Codebreaker. Triple H was also given a chance to earn his spot in the Chamber match as he went into a Gauntlet Match against the other four members of Nexus other than Barrett. Despite beating the two big men in Skip Sheffield and Ezekiel Jackson, Heath Slater came out to assist David Otunga who pinned Triple H and ended his hopes – exactly what Wade Barrett wanted. Will Triple H, Edge and Chris Jericho be handed another chance to qualify for the Elimination Chamber tonight? Or will the two remaining spots be handed to others on the RAW roster?

TAG TEAM CHAMPIONS IN ACTION!
After their title defence on SMACKDOWN last week, the British Empire were confronted by two teams that they controversially disposed of in the Royal Rumble Tag Team Turmoil match – Cryme Tyme and the Hart Dynasty. Tonight, on RAW, one of those teams will be given the opportunity to get revenge – Hart Dynasty will face British Empire in a non-title match. With the new Tag Team Champions looking stronger each night, the Dynasty will have their work cut out if they are get a win but history is on their side – many of the storied Hart family have held Tag Team gold in the past including Bret “Hitman” Hart, Jim “Anvil” Neidhart and the late Owen Hart. A win tonight over the champions would surely push the Dynasty right into contention for a shot at the Tag Team Championships down the line. But can they get the job done tonight?

*** CONFIRMED ***

NON-TITLE TAG TEAM MATCH
British Empire (c) (w/Finlay) vs. Hart Dynasty (w/Natalya)

“BEAT THE CLOCK” CHALLENGE MATCH
Randy Orton vs. SMACKDOWN superstar of John Cena’s choice

ELIMINATION CHAMBER QUALIFYING HANDICAP MATCH
Triple H vs. Joe Hennig & Percy Watson (w/Kurt Angle)

*** JOIN US THIS MONDAY FOR RAW! ***

========================================================

WWE SUPERSTARS
*** RESULTS ***

CRYME TYME vs. HUSKY HARRIS & MICHAEL TARVER
In their first match back in the WWE since their attack by, allegedly, the British Empire, at the Rumble, Shad and JTG overcame the efforts of Tarver and Harris to record a victory. Tarver and Harris dominated early but they couldn’t deal with the power of Shad and a top rope leg drop from JTG to Tarver proved decisive for the 3. Cryme Tyme will surely now be looking for revenge on the new Tag Team Champions?
WINNER: Cryme Tyme

BRIE BELLA vs. NATALYA
With the Divas Division on red alert from the arrival of Kharma by the side of Michelle McCool, Natalya got herself an important victory over Brie as she looks to make an impact and position herself for a future Divas Championship shot. The Sharpshooter was enough for Natalya to force the tap out from Brie and she now will watch the Elimination Chamber build with interest – will McCool be able to get her shot at the title at the Chamber? We know that Layla will challenge the champion, Maryse, but if McCool remains unbeaten on NXT over the coming weeks, she will enter the match and make it a Triple Threat too.
WINNER: Natalya

TEAM ANGLE 2 (w/Kurt Angle) vs. THE USOS
In their first ever WWE match as a team, Joe Hennig and Percy Watson were able to get a big win over the Usos to make the WWE take notice. With their mentor, Kurt Angle, beside the ring, Hennig and Watson were able to function well as a team to make up for the Uso’s experience advantage. However, as is often the case, Angle played a part where he shouldn’t. As Jey Uso moved up the ropes looking to put Hennig away, Angle caused a slight distraction to slow him down. Jey’s subsequent splash missed Hennig and he rolled him up to get the 3-count. Good first match together for Hennig and Watson, what does the future hold for them?
WINNER: Team Angle 2

TED DiBIASE vs. EVAN BOURNE
In the main event, DiBiase – who hinted before the match that he would be cashing in his right to a US Championship match very soon – edged out Evan Bourne in an even contest. The end of the match saw Bourne miss with an attempted 450 Splash and this allowed DiBiase to lock him up and hit Dream Street to get the 3-count. More momentum for DiBiase as he moves towards his chance against Justin Gabriel in the future.
WINNER: Ted DiBiase

========================================================

*** LATEST NEWS ***

WWE DRAFT MOVED: The annual WWE draft has been switched from the Bragging Rights PPV on the 22nd of May and will now take place in a 3-hour special RAW on Monday 11th April – the second RAW after WrestleMania 27. With many superstars moving around right now in the WWE, the WWE wishes to clarify things ahead of post-WrestleMania storylines and have opted to move the Draft to do this. No word yet on whether the Bragging Rights PPV will remain although tickets are due to go on sale for the Air Canada Center in Toronto next week. The draft is expected to see at least one big name moved to RAW; many people are speculating that SMACKDOWN is indeed the better show, as Michael Cole keeps telling us in the show, and Chip Butty wishes to spice things up on RAW to even up the balance.

THE ROCK & NXT: WWE hall of famer The Rock, a mentor on the NXT show, has been written off the show due to film commitments he has in Hollywood right now. On screen, SMACKDOWN commentator Mick Foley has replaced Rock while he recovers from an attack backstage. Rock is expected to return to NXT for the final build towards the NXT Final which is scheduled for NXT. WrestleZone sources have been informed that the original plan for NXT saw Dolph Ziggler eliminated this week but backstage officials have been impressed with his recent work. Although his head is very much still on the chopping block, Ziggler could force himself into surviving NXT where MVP was eliminated last week. MVP’s contract with WWE was due to end after WrestleMania 27 and he will be released early as a result.

BUTTY PLEASED WITH IMPROVEMENTS TO TAG DIVISION, WORK STILL TO BE DONE WITH DIVAS: After a recent push (through NXT) of the Tag Team division, WWE owner Chip Butty is said to be happy with the small steps of improvement being made with the Tag Team Division and is thought to be very happy with the impact of the British Empire since their arrival on the scene. Expect a long title run from them and possibly a WrestleMania match – a thought that would have been unthinkable just a few weeks ago. Butty concedes privately that more is still needed though to focus not just on the title picture and he has challenged the likes of the Usos, the Hart Dynasty and Cryme Tyme to step up their game in the coming weeks. As far as the Divas Division goes, Butty believes that more work is needed. The introduction of Kharma as Michelle McCool’s bodyguard has received mixed reviews but she is expected to begin competing post Elimination Chamber. Big changes are expected for the Divas, initially via NXT, but Butty is adamant that each RAW and SMACKDOWN will eventually feature at least one Divas match as well as a Tag Team match. We’ll see how that works out!

WRESTLEMANIA 27: The main events of WrestleMania 27 are being kept close to the chest of WWE officials with pure speculation the only thing going round right now. One man who can be counted out of the WrestleMania picture is Kane who was written off TV for a few months on SMACKDOWN last week when he lost the Buried Alive match. This should give Kane, Glenn Jacobs, time to recover some small, niggling injuries as well as making a chance for a big return down the line. The Undertaker is now being advertised at every SMACKDOWN show up to WrestleMania as he returns to a full time schedule in the build up to the show. WWE have confirmed that there will be no new arrivals to the company in the lead up to WrestleMania although there could be some surprise appearances. The event in Atlanta is now officially sold out and is expected to feature SMACKDOWN’s John Cena in the last match, the ‘main’ main event. Question is, who will he be facing?

RELEASES FROM THE WWE: WrestleZone understands that – as well as the five superstars from NXT – five WWE superstars have been released early from their contracts. These five guys are: Caylen Croft, Darren Young, Yoshi Tatsu, Chris Masters and Luke Gallows. With much expected from several up and coming talents – such as Tyler Reks, Damien Sandow, Brodus Clay and Jinder Mahal – and the signing of Mexican sensation Sin Cara, expect to see several debuts on RAW and SMACKDOWN during the summer to replace the stars released.​

 

[#1Peep]

Peep's Smackdown Review

* I've been reading as always but it's time to review the 'A' show at the moment - Smackdown. Just a side note, I don't understand why you took Rock off of NXT (even if he is a big star for it), you should have stuck with it. I'm liking what you're doing with Cole but, even though he is so easy to hate - you might need to tone him down a bit (maybe just a couple of backstage segments a week) otherwise it will become unreadable. I loved this opening segment and I'm loving this feud between Christian and Cole, more of this please. I thought Jeff Hardy coming back was a great, realistic move but it feels like he has just faded back in, without much fanfare - for such a massive star, I would have liked something more. You have used Matt nicely thus far, he is pretty underrated in terms of his promos and storytelling and another solid promo from him here. A nice solid tag match to get each feud on the show and I have high hopes for Rey and Del Rio - a great feud for the IC title I see ending at 'Mania - book it! Kofi is progressing very nicely but I really, really hope he beats Show one on one and gets a more interesting program for 'Mania. I have this trouble on my show, Show is a big star but he is just so boring, I really don't know what to do with him. I find (in real life) he is interesting for a month after each turn (either face or heel) then he just gets boring once more.

* Honestly, I never believe in tweener characters as I feel they always lean towards being a face - but I do love this Punk. A pretty stellar promo from Punk her as well, awesome stuff. A great match between the Hardys and I loved the unique finish. Heel Matt could be the way to go but if he feuds with Jeff it would be rather stupid, we've seen that all before. I'd love this great moment to catapult Matt onto someone else, with Jeff seemingly forgiving his shaken bro'. Honestly, I haven't been terribly impressed with the tag division as a whole. The division isn't very strong and I don't like the new champions too much, I don't get why Finlay isn't in the ring with Regal on the outside. But, I believe multiple title defenses is a good way to build up a champion, even if the result is predictable. I do like this change with Hawkins/Ryder - allow Ryder to get into singles competition while Hawkins continues in the tag realm. A bit of a dull promo, mainly from Swagger - I would have liked a more concrete reason for the two teaming, besides just wanting to win. Either man could have won but we will see where this is going, I would have liked Ryder to win then beat Hawkins, and allow both men to move on quickly.

* Punk continues his great character movement as he sticks it to both Cole and Cena (possible WM opponent?) I loved Cena's involvement in the main event, as if he is cleaning up Smackdown for Cole by getting rid of two old men! Another possible hint for Cena's opponent? You add another big star into the Smackdown Chamber and you have creeped in a few potential story lines. A great episode buddy, keep them coming and I can't wait for the Chamber matches - and for Wrestlemania GCB style. Keep it up mate!

 

[JamJam]

JAM's Review​

Haven't given you some feedback in a while, so I apologize for that. Hopefully this feedback I'll be doing will suffice for ya. Anyway, let's get this started!

Really liking that you're giving Christian such a big push on Smackdown. You show us Christian's serious side and you did well in portraying that when added in those actions that Christian did such as “slapping the mic out of Cole's hands.” Stuff like that. It was a strong opening segment but I felt it ended a little too early. Main event should be a good one with the stipulation that Cole put on it, what an arse, lol.

Kind of a cheesy promo from the Hardy Boyz but it works. Maybe you turn one of them heel later on tonight? But I'm not really sure about that. I agree with Peep that Matt's been underrated and he's been one of the better characters in your thread thus far. Also have to agree with Peep about Jeff being faded back in, it seems. Would think that he wouldn't be paired up with his brother but now that you've given that to us, it seems you can go a lot of routes with this one. It's just a matter of choosing the right one.

That was a nice use of recent events and I may start doing this in my thread, giving us a reminder of what happened the week before. Not much to say here, pretty standard stuff. Hoping to see more of Kofi though, he's been my favorite character in your entire thread, but Christian's slowly creeping up on him. More Kofi please!

Spot on with the Punk promo here. He had a lot to say and everything made sense. He put over how much of an arse Cole is and that's what you wanna do with a new authority figure, especially if they're heel, have them be established by many ways, like this interview for example. So Punk is still tweener right? I don't know, seems to me that he's been rather face as of late, maybe a heel move tonight in some match so that he keeps that tweener side of him in his character. More Christian here, woo!

Another Hardy feud, really? Oh well, it was the only logical thing to do when you brought in Jeff. And when you had him win this, I immediately thought that Matt would turn heel, and he did. I'm not too ecstatic about this feud, but I'm sure you can change my mind with the next couple of shows. And now this exchange with Cole was interesting, another tweener in Matt?

The Empire was always going to win this one and I'm actually starting to like them a bit more each week. Regal has been great as the main mouthpiece for the group. Nice touch having Cryme Tyme and The Hart Dynasty make their intentions for the titles known. As for the whole Ryder/Hawkins/Swagger dilemma, it's something different. Definitely think that Swagger would be a good tag team partner but the breaking up of the Broskis was just so sudden for me, wish it didn't happen this soon.

This is exactly what I was thinking would happen in that Cena/Christian match. It was nice having both Cole and Punk out on commentary, definitely added something to the match. The match was excellently written as usual, Christian and Cena just have that chemistry that Christian and Orton had in their previous feud in real life. I liked everything that happened in the match. The ending was good as well so it looks like Christian is finally in the Chamber match, woooooo!

Oh damn, I forgot about this match, it would definitely main event for sure. Anyway, wow, what a match. I could say that towards the end, it was a bit too much, but I was loving everything about it. Total chaos in this match as expected. But hmm, maybe we somehow get Cena vs. 'Taker at Wrestlemania but what would happen to his RR win, very interesting here.

A lot of interesting things happening here on the show GCB. I will say that some things are getting to be too predictable, the only thing that probably wasn't predictable was the main event, and I liked it a lot. You're still producing strong shows so I commend you on that. EC is shaping up to be a nice PPV. Definitely looking forward to SD's EC Match since there's just so much story to be told in it, good job!

 

[GCB]

MONDAY NIGHT RAW LIVE
TARGET CENTER, MINNEAPOLIS, MINNESOTA
MONDAY FEBRUARY 7TH, 2011

A video package from RAW last week airs with highlights of the Fatal Four Way match between Kurt Angle, Miz, Daniel Bryan and John Morrison battling it out to try and earn the right to challenge Wade Barrett for the WWE Championship at the Elimination Chamber PPV. Big moves of the four men involved are shown before we see Angle hitting the Angle Slam on Daniel Bryan to seemingly win the contest. However, we then see Triple H coming down to the ring to cause the distraction and cost the Olympian is chance to win the match. We then see Morrison surprising Angle with the Chuck Kick before rolling him up ... 1 ... 2 ... 3! John Morrison is going to challenge for the WWE Championship! The video moves on to show Chip Butty announcing Triple H’s chance to qualify for the Elimination Chamber match – if he can beat all four members of Nexus in a Gauntlet match. Highlights of this match are shown as we see Hunter hit the Pedigree on Skip Sheffield for the win before Ezekiel Jackson loses via DQ when Sheffield smashes Triple H with a chair to the back. We then see Hunter mounting a comeback against David Otunga until Heath Slater shoves the referee out of the ring to assist Otunga with doing more damage to Hunter. The revived referee is shown counting the 1 ... 2 ... 3 on Hunter and then the look of anger in the Game’s eyes before the video moves on. We see Randy Orton being warned by HBK to not touch Cena, we then see Orton heading out to the ring where Cena is stood. Snippets of the challenge from Cena to face Orton, one more time, one last time, at Elimination Chamber are played before we see Orton accept the challenge and then hits the RKO to SMACKDOWN General Manager, Michael Cole. The video ends with the ice cold eyes of Orton staring through the ropes towards Cena as RAW is about to begin ...

*** BURN IT TO THE GROUND ***

*** PYRO ***
*** PYRO ***
*** PYRO ***
*** PYRO ***
*** PYRO ***

JIM ROSS:
We are live, ladies and gentlemen, in Minneapolis, Minnesota, thirteen days away from the Elimination Chamber pay-per-view on the Road to WrestleMania 27. We’re here with Monday Night RAW and, King, what a show it is going to be!

JERRY LAWLER:
You’re right about that, JR! The pressure is building on the RAW superstars as they jockey for position heading towards the last major stop on the Road to WrestleMania – Elimination Chamber!

JIM ROSS:
And tonight, King, Chip Butty, the WWE owner, has made a match – it will be a 2 on 1 Handicap Match as Team Angle 2, Joe Hennig and Percy Watson, face Triple H – if the Game can get the win tonight, he will qualify for the RAW Elimination Chamber match and the chance to secure a place in the WWE Championship match at WrestleMania!

JERRY LAWLER:
Every single RAW superstar is desperate to main event WrestleMania, JR!

*** AIN’T NO MAKE BELIEVE ***

*** JOHN MORRISON ***
#1 CONTENDER FOR THE WWE CHAMPIONSHIP​

JIM ROSS:
And this man right here King has a great opportunity to do just that!

The slo-mo entrance of Morrison goes ahead as the brightly coloured pyro explodes behind the Number 1 contender, Morrison holds up his arm to cheers from the WWE Universe as he stands wearing a long coat and shades. Morrison makes his way towards the ring to a good reception as he looks delighted to have the chance to go to Elimination Chamber and challenge for the WWE Championship – his first opportunity at the WWE’s main gold. As Morrison enters the ring, JR and King discuss his chances of victory at the Chamber PPV whilst Morrison salutes the fans. They believe that Morrison needs to find a way to eliminate Nexus ahead of the PPV if he is to stand any chance at all. Morrison has taken a microphone and he stands centrally in the ring as his music fades, we are going to hear from the Number 1 contender here ...

JOHN MORRISON:
Wow! Number 1 contender for the WWE Championship! Yeah!

Nice pop from the WWE Universe here in Minneapolis.

JOHN MORRISON:
Growing up, the WWE Championship was everything I ever wanted. When I broke into the business, I knew I wanted to get to the WWE! When I got to the WWE, I set my sights on winning the WWE Championship. Everything I have done since I arrived here in the WWE has been about getting myself to this position here right now ...

More cheers for Morrison as he certainly appears to be excited about the opportunity he has earned for himself ...

JOHN MORRISON:
In two weeks time, I head to Detroit for the Elimination Chamber with a chance to write my name in the history books – a chance to win the WWE Championship and a chance to earn the right to head to Atlanta, Georgia, for WrestleMania 27 ... as the WWE Champion!

More cheers from the WWE Universe as Morrison’s determination to headline WrestleMania is clear ...

JOHN MORRISON:
WrestleMania 27 ... I’ve dreamed about WrestleMania, I’ve dreamt of headlining it, of raising the WWE Championship high above my head and hearing the WWE Universe cheer ... (More cheers) ... but to do that, I need to overcome Wade Barrett ... and Nexus.

Boos for the mention of the Nexus ...

JOHN MORRISON:
If I am to win the WWE Championship, I will need to somehow find a way to not only beat Barrett but to beat four other men. We all saw what happened at Survivor Series. We all saw what happened at Vengeance. We’ve all seen what happens on RAW most weeks and we all saw what happened to Triple H at the Rumble. The fact of the matter is ...

*** WE ARE ONE ***

*** NEXUS ***
WWE Champion Wade Barrett
Ezekiel Jackson
David Otunga
Skip Sheffield
Heath Slater​

Boos erupt around the arena as the WWE Champion, accompanied as ever by his group, heads out for the ring carrying a microphone in one hand and raising his fist in the air with the other. The WWE Championship gleams around the waist of Barrett as he saunters across the stage, ignoring the jeers, before he signals for his music to be faded.

WADE BARRETT:
Morrison, I advise you to shut up. I advise you to shut up ... now!

Morrison scowls at Barrett as he looks from the ring up the ramp where Nexus are slowly heading towards him. Barrett puts his finger to his lips and signals to Morrison to be quiet once more.

WADE BARRETT:
I stopped you there, Morrison, before you said something that you might live to regret. You see, you were about to tell us all what the fact of the matter is. Well, I thought I would come out and finish it for you. (Morrison looks unimpressed) You see, Morrison, the fact of the matter is ... I am just better than you.

Huge boos for this statement – what a claim from Wade Barrett!

WADE BARRETT:
I am better than you, I am better than Triple H, I am better than Kurt Angle, I am better than Randy Orton, I am better than anybody else here on RAW and that, that Morrison, is why I am the WWE Champion.

A glance behind Barrett between Jackson and Sheffield ...

WADE BARRETT:
You see, I know what you claimed last week. You claimed that without these four men behind me, without Justin Gabriel, I would not be the WWE Champion. You could not be further from the truth, Morrison. These men here stand behind me and they know their role in the Nexus. They know that I am the best in the WWE, they know that I deserve to be the WWE Champion.

More raised eyebrows behind Barrett – it appears that he isn’t speaking the complete truth right now!

WADE BARRETT:
I am the leader of the Nexus, Morrison, because I have earned their respect. I won NXT, I earned these men’s respect and they follow my lead as we dominate RAW and the WWE. Without them, would I be WWE Champion? Of course I would be. But I am thankful for the support they give me as I look to shut people like you up.

Barrett and Nexus are now stood at the foot of the ramp. Barrett orders Nexus’ four members to make their way around the ring – Jackson, Otunga, Sheffield and Slater spread out on all four sides – before Barrett steps up the ring steps and through the ropes. He now stands opposite Morrison who is eying the Nexus around the ring with a wary look in his eye. JR and King suggest he needs to get out of there as soon as he can.

WADE BARRETT:
You see, Morrison, I have done in six months what you couldn’t do in six years. I have won the big one, I am the WWE Champion. I will be the WWE Champion at WrestleMania, I will be the WWE Champion for a long time. At Elimination Chamber, Morrison, it will be a walk in the park. I don’t need Nexus to beat you. Nexus will be with me for support only ...

JOHN MORRISON:
Is that a fact?

Barrett looks annoyed by the interruption.

JOHN MORRISON:
Why don’t you back up that claim then, Wade? If you don’t need Nexus, why don’t you prove it? Come out to the ring at Elimination Chamber, come out and face me like a man. One on one?

Barrett smirks once more and laughs in Morrison’s face.

WADE BARRETT:
Is there something wrong with your ears? I’ve just told you, I don’t need Nexus but they will want to be out there to support their leader and I am not going to stop them from doing that.

The camera catches David Otunga looking a little annoyed about something as he narrows his eyes whilst looking into the ring ...

JOHN MORRISON:
Wade, if you are the leader that you say you are, why don’t we do something about this? How about a match tonight?

Cheers from the WWE Universe.

JOHN MORRISON:
How about we have ourselves a match tonight? I’ll find four guys backstage that are willing to team with me to face you and your Nexus here tonight? And if I win, Wade, Nexus are barred from ringside at the Elimination Chamber!

Cheers for this idea, Barrett smirks at it.

WADE BARRETT:
Do you think that will help your chances, Morrison? Trust me, it won’t. I accept your challenge ... (Morrison smiles) ... on one condition!

Morrison’s expression changes slightly as he waits for Barrett to explain ...

WADE BARRETT:
You see, Morrison, Elimination Chamber will be a walk in the park for me. The only danger for me at the Chamber will be injury before WrestleMania 27. The only thing easier than facing you ... would be to have the night off.

Boos and jeers for the comments of Barrett ...

WADE BARRETT:
So, that is the deal, Morrison. If you and your team win, Nexus is barred from ringside. If Nexus win ... you join Nexus and you forfeit the match to me at the Chamber.

Morrison looks angry over the condition but he nods his head ...

JOHN MORRISON:
You’re on, Wade. I will find a team and we will beat you tonight. When tonight is over, Nexus will play no part in our match at the Chamber. And your title, Wade, your title will be in more danger than it has ever been.

Cheers for the determined words of Morrison, can he find a team to banish Nexus from the ring tonight?

WADE BARRETT:
I don’t think so, Morrison. You see, Nexus are more united than ever. Tonight, the Nexus gets a new member ... and I get the night off in two weeks time. Because, Morrison ... (Boos echo around the arena as Barrett looks out to the four men on the four different sides of the ring) ... you’re either Nexus ...

Wade Barrett smirks and beckons the four men to enter the ring; all four of them step up onto the apron and the situation becomes increasingly threatening for the Number 1 contender ...

WADE BARRETT:
... or you’re against us.

Jackson, Otunga, Sheffield and Slater step through the ropes and advance towards Morrison in the middle of the ring as Barrett steps back and drops through the ropes and out of the ring. He laughs as he stands at the foot of the ropes looking up at Morrison who is backing away with a look of worry on his face. However, loud cheers alert us to the presence of somebody else in the arena ...

Carlito, former Nexus member Justin Gabriel and RVD storm down the ramp, past Wade Barrett and slide into the ring sending Nexus scattering. Morrison, in fighting stance ready to take on Nexus, looks relieved to see them and he embraces them as they watch Nexus join Barrett on the ramp. It appears we have four of Team Morrison sorted out – Carlito, US Champion Justin Gabriel and RVD. Nexus back away up the ramp with a look of annoyance on their faces, Barrett in particular. As JR and King remind us, it will be Morrison and four others to face Nexus in a huge Tag Team match – if Team Morrison win, Nexus are barred from ringside at the Elimination Chamber; if Nexus win, Morrison will join Nexus and then forfeit the match at the Elimination Chamber. King says that he hopes Morrison knows what he is doing!

The camera switches backstage where we see Kofi Kingston, all smiles as usual, walking through the backstage area. The SMACKDOWN superstar, the ‘2010 Breakout Star’ here in the WWE, is here tonight for a match – is he the man that John Cena has sent to face Randy Orton in the ‘Beat the Clock’ challenge tonight? JR invites us all to find out after the break!

*** COMMERCIAL BREAK ***

*** VOICES ***

*** RANDY ORTON ***​

The crowd erupt as the ‘Viper’ himself walks out with a look of determination etched on his face. Slowly, he makes his way towards the ring as JR and King discuss last week’s challenge from John Cena – one last match between the pair of them at Elimination Chamber. JR runs us through the deal for this week’s Beat the Clock challenge. John Cena will send a member of the SMACKDOWN roster to RAW to face Orton, Orton will send a member of the RAW roster to SMACKDOWN to face Cena. Whoever wins their match in the quickest time, that man will get to choose the match type for the match at the Elimination Chamber, a massive chance to swing the advantage towards them. JR and King speculate over who might be coming out to face Orton – will it be Kofi Kingston? Orton salutes the crowd in the ring with his ‘Destiny’ pose before standing to await the SMACKDOWN star he will face tonight ...

*** CRANK IT UP ***

*** BIG SHOW ***​

There is a collective gasp as out steps the Big Show and Orton looks passive as he awaits the World’s Largest Athlete. JR and King hype up the difficulty of the challenge that Orton will face here – how do you quickly beat the Big Show? Show approaches the ring looking confident of defeating the Viper tonight. JR reminds us that Show is preparing for a big match of his own at the Elimination Chamber as he participates in the SMACKDOWN Elimination Chamber match for the World Championship of CM Punk that was confirmed on last Friday night’s SMACKDOWN ...

Show stares up at Orton in the ring who has no fear on his face – he knows the size of the task but also knows he can win it. Show enters the ring and limbers up in preparation before the referee signals for the bell ...

SINGLES MATCH – BEAT THE CLOCK CHALLENGE
BIG SHOW vs. RANDY ORTON

Orton, desperate for a win as soon as possible, goes on the attack from the start and he knocks Show off guard early with his fast start. Although Show tries to counter with some of his power moves, he cannot hold Orton down for long and the Viper appears inspired with the thought of a big match with Cena coming up at the Elimination Chamber PPV. Despite the weight of Show, Orton manages to catch his opponent coming through the ropes and he hits – although not with his legs hanging on the ropes – a DDT that crashes Show’s skull into the mat. It is beginning to look academic here for the Viper and he begins to pound the mat waiting ... waiting ... RKO! ORTON HITS THE RKO! Quick as he can, Orton pounces and hooks the leg ...

** 1 **
** 2 **
** 3 **​

WINNER:
RANDY ORTON (4:43) via pinfall

Orton looks tired as he rolls away and out of the ring to stand near the announce table but a smile passes over his face as he looks up at the time of 4:43 showing on the titantron and nods his head. He is clearly pleased with the time and the referee raises his hand in victory as JR and King suggest that Cena will do well to beat any member of the RAW roster in less than 4 minutes and 43 seconds. Show looks angry but he exits the ring and begins to walk away up the ramp while Orton steps back into the ring and salutes the crowd ...

???:
Can I have your attention please?

Boos and jeers erupt around the arena as the SMACKDOWN General Manager Michael Cole steps out onto the stage. He has a quiet word with Big Show who stops and stays beside Cole – clearly, Cole wants protection here tonight after last week. Cole is ready to speak to Orton ...

MICHAEL COLE:
Orton, you listen to me for a moment. Minneapolis, be quiet for a moment, give me some respect and listen to what I’ve got to say!

Boos again for Cole as he demands silence from the WWE Universe.

MICHAEL COLE:
Last week, Orton, you put your hands on me and you hit me with an RKO for no good reason. Let’s take a look ...

Cheers for the mention of the RKO last week as footage rolls showing the unprovoked attack from Orton to the SMACKDOWN General Manager ...

MICHAEL COLE:
Orton, the attack was unprovoked, there was no reason for it. Because you’d be banned from striking Cena, you thought that you could attack me? What planet are you on, Orton? What made you think that I would allow you to attack me like that?

Orton is listening to Cole with a look of disdain on his face – he would clearly like to RKO him once more as well. Cole points to himself and then resumes his verbal tirade against the Viper ...

MICHAEL COLE:
Let me tell you something, Orton. Nobody touches Michael Cole. Nobody puts their hands on me. I am the greatest General Manager in WWE history and I do not deserve to be subjected to violence in the way you did last week. So, tonight, I am here to speak to WWE owner Chip Butty to complain about your RKO last week. (Jeers erupt around the arena) I have told you all to be quiet, Minneapolis.

More boos from the crowd as Cole again demands their silence – unsuccessfully.

MICHAEL COLE:
Now, Orton, I have spoken to Chip Butty and he wants to punish you right here, right now, tonight. But I pleaded with him and he agreed that I could speak to you first. He agreed that if you co-operated with me, I could drop the complaint instead. However, if you choose not to co-operate ...

Cole steps into the ring as Big Show waits on the outside of the ring and watches intently.

MICHAEL COLE:
It’s a simple question, Orton. Answer it and the complaint is dropped. Refuse and the punishment will stand.

Orton has a microphone now as he prepares ...

MICHAEL COLE:
Orton, I want you to tell me ... who are you sending to SMACKDOWN on Friday night to face John Cena?

Boos for the question asked, Orton smirks at Cole incredulously, he can’t believe what Cole is asking him. Cole looks at Orton expectantly waiting for the answer ...

RANDY ORTON:
You mean that you are serious? That’s the question? (Cole nods his head) Cole, I don’t care what complaint you have against me. You can go back to SMACKDOWN, you can tell Cena that he can wait until Friday night and then he can prepare for the Elimination Chamber where he is going to get the biggest beatdown on his life. You can tell Cena that when I see him at the Chamber pay-per-view, I am intent on destroying his WrestleMania dream, once and for all, with a devastating ... R ... K ... O!

Cheers echo around the arena for Orton’s words as Cole looks furious that his plan has not worked.

MICHAEL COLE:
Is that it then? You’d rather take the punishment?

Orton laughs in Cole’s face, he does not fear anything that Cole might do.

MICHAEL COLE:
In that case, Orton, let me inform you of the punishment that Chip Butty has decreed ... (Cole looks up at the titantron which still dispays 4:43 as the time for Cena to beat on SMACKDOWN later this week) ... Nice time, Orton. It’s a shame that the punishment that Chip Butty has decided means that ...

Cole smirks at Orton whose smile falters a little ...

MICHAEL COLE:
... the time that Cena now has to beat is 14 minutes and 43 seconds.

Boos echo around the arena, Chip Butty has punished Orton by adding ten minutes to his time. Orton kicks the ropes in frustration and then stares at Cole with a look of longing in his eyes. Cole backs away fearing the worst ...

MICHAEL COLE:
Hold it there, Orton. Hold it there! You don’t want to do that!

Cole stumbles backwards and then falls over and lands on his ass dropping the microphone on the mat. Into the ring comes Big Show behind Orton as he stalks Cole ... Show spins Orton round ... CHOKE SLAM! BIG SHOW CHOKE SLAMS ORTON! Cole looks relieved as he rolls out of the ring and Big Show follows him. Cole is delighted with the actions of Show now and they back away up the ramp smiling. JR and King suggest that whoever Orton chooses from RAW, there is a good chance that Cena will beat that person in 14 minutes and 43 seconds as RAW heads into a commercial ...

*** COMMERCIAL BREAK ***​

 

[GCB]

(continued)​

RAW returns with the RAW General Manager shown in his office looking left and then right. As the camera pans out, we see that HBK is stood in the middle of two RAW superstars who were supposed to face each other last week – Chris Jericho and Edge. Jericho is fuming as he focuses completely on Edge; the Rated R Superstar’s focus flicks between Jericho and the GM. Michaels holds his hands up to keep the two of them apart and then speaks ...

SHAWN MICHAELS:
OK, guys, listen to me and listen good because I am not going to accept a repeat of last week. I have two spots remaining in the Elimination Chamber match in two weeks and, tonight, one of you is going to fill those spots. You see, I am making a tag team match tonight and it will be you, Chris Jericho, teaming with Daniel Bryan to face you, Edge ...

A frosty atmosphere between Edge and HBK as he turns his head to look that way ...

SHAWN MICHAELS:
... and your partner, Sheamus. If your team wins, Jericho, you will qualify for the Chamber. Edge, if your team wins, you qualify. I want it to be a fair contest, I want you to respect the rules and I want you to get this sorted tonight. Do you understand me?

HBK looks alternately at both men who semi acknowledge the proclamation of HBK ...

CHRIS JERICHO:
That’s fine by me, Michaels. Tonight, I get the win I need, in front of all the Jericholics watching, and I qualify for the Elimination Chamber. The fact that I get to give you a beating, junior ... (Jericho smirks at Edge) ... will be a bonus.

Edge chuckles as Jericho exits the General Manager’s office but the camera stays with him as he looks at Shawn Michaels ...

EDGE:
You know what, Shawn? It’s about time you recognised what a talent you have here on RAW in myself. You force me to qualify for everything when you should just place me in the matches to start with. At the Rumble, I know I proved myself to you but you can’t accept that can you? Why don’t you cut out the stubborn attitude and just accept that I am the biggest star on RAW right now?

HBK smiles at Edge ...

SHAWN MICHAELS:
Edge, as ever, big words. You seem to forget that at the Rumble, it was me that eliminated you. Remember? (Cheers from the crowd as they recall this but Edge looks angered by this reminder) Now, I don’t need to explain myself to you and I told you weeks ago that I wouldn’t explain myself to you. If you don’t like my decisions, that it tough. I’m the General Manager around here and what I say goes ...

HBK’s attention is turned towards somebody else who walks into the room – WWE owner Chip Butty is here again tonight! He simply pauses for a second and then nods his head in greeting to Michaels before moving past as Edge turns and leaves. The camera focuses on HBK as he looks thoughtful before returning to the ring in time for the arrival of the participants of the next match ...

*** NEW FOUNDATION ***

*** HART DYNASTY ***
David Hart Smith
Tyson Kidd
(w/Natalya)​

A good pop for the Hart Dynasty as they head out towards the ring ready for action here tonight with Natalya by their sides as normal. The former Tag Team Champions make their way into the ring and salute the crowd before Kidd takes a microphone and it appears that he has something to say here before their match.

TYSON KIDD:
Back at the Royal Rumble, we were robbed out of our opportunity to win the Tag Team Championships when we were attacked by Finlay during the British Empire’s entrance ...

A replay of Finlay hitting Kidd in the knee with the flag and then jamming it into the stomach of Hart Smith is shown before we see Kidd then tapping out to the Regal Stretch moments later ...

TYSON KIDD:
Now, David and I took a couple of weeks off after that attack but now we’re back. We realise that Cryme Tyme also have issues with the Empire but tonight we are going to show that we are the ones who deserve to challenge for the titles. Tonight, we beat the Empire and get our shots at the Tag Team Championships.

JR informs us that this is not officially a match to determine a Number 1 contender but King reminds us that a win over the champions always gets you noticed and should lead to a title match down the line.

*** RULE BRITTANNIA ***

*** BRITISH EMPIRE ***
Mason Ryan
William Regal
(w/Finlay) | Tag Team Champions​

Finlay waves the Union Jack flag as the Empire head out to the ring proudly wearing their Tag Team Championships around their waists. Ryan leads the way and he looks ready for a brawl here tonight but Regal hangs back a little, an air of suspicion in his eyes, a look of annoyance. As the Empire step through the ropes, boos echo around the arena, the Empire are already well disliked by the WWE Universe, and they have words with the Dynasty who look pumped up and ready to go here tonight. Regal discusses things with Ryan and they agree to Regal starting the match whilst David Hart Smith is going to start for the Dynasty ...

TAG TEAM MATCH (Non-Title)
BRITISH EMPIRE (w/Finlay) vs. HART DYNASTY

With the Dynasty desperate for a win to get them right in the frame for a shot at the Tag Team Championships, they start out fast and take control of the match early. However, with some distraction from Finlay outside the ring, the Empire get on top and the muscle of Mason Ryan keeps them in control as he begins to cut Tyson Kidd off from his partner and corner. Quick tags between Regal and Ryan allow them to remain fresh but Kidd cannot get away from them to make the tag. However, Kidd’s quick feet do allow him to counter when Regal looks for a suplex and David Hart Smith is able to get the hot tag that brings the Dynasty back into the match. Hart Smith runs through Regal with some heavy hitting shoulder blocks before he knocks Ryan to the floor as well. Finlay looks to cause more distraction as he leaps onto the apron but Tyson Kidd spots him and catches him with a Roundhouse kick that sends him spinning back off the apron. Hart Smith lifts Regal up in the air so that his head, shoulders and chest are exposed so that Kidd can hit a springboard dropkick that crashes Regal down to the mat. Hart Smith grabs the legs of the Tag Team Champion and the crowd get to their feet as they prepare to see the Sharpshooter ... However, Finlay and Ryan are up and they manage to drag Regal out of the ring to safety. To the disgust of the crowd, the Champions begin to back away up the ramp with Finlay carrying their Tag Team belts with him. Jeers and boos echo around the arena as the referee begins the count and reaches 5 with no sign of the Empire returning ... 6 ... Kidd wants to go out and fetch them but the referee holds both the Dynasty boys back ... 7 ... Regal waves his hand to dismiss the chances of returning to the ring ...

** 8 **
** 9 **
** 10 **​

WINNER:
HART DYNASTY (5:17) via countout

The crowd boo as the Empire back away up the ramp and take the easy way out of the match rather than fight the Dynasty who look on frustrated in the ring. Kidd and Hart Smith drop down through the ropes and stand at the foot of the ramp as they watch the Tag Team Champions on the stage heading away from them.

*** BRINGIN’ DA HOOD T U ***

*** CRYME TYME ***
JTG
Shad​

The Empire look behind them with a look of concern as Cryme Tyme appear on stage with grinning faces as they sandwich the champions. Regal and Finlay look worried and they drag Ryan with them as they look to find a safe spot away from the two teams who desperately want their chance to win the Tag Team Championships from them. As Cryme Tyme and the Dynasty move in on them, the Empire decide to cut their losses and they rush off towards the side of the stage and escape the attention of the two teams who are left on the stage looking to each other. The referee – carrying the Tag Team Championships – is left stood between them as the champions have made their exits. As Cryme Tyme and the Dynasty look to each other, JTG grabs one of the belts from the referee and holds up in a symbolic gesture towards Hart Smith and Kidd. Kidd grabs the other belt and he raises it high too – clearly, both teams want their shots and want them very soon.

*** COMMERCIAL BREAK ***​

RAW returns with Jim Ross and King at the announce table looking into the camera ...

JIM ROSS:
Ladies and Gentlemen, we are now moving down the ‘Road to WrestleMania’ and, King, it is that time of year again. The time of year where the WWE looks to honour the best in the history of the business ...

King nods his head in agreement ...

JERRY LAWLER:
You know, JR, I accomplished a lot here in the WWE and with other wrestling promotions around the world but my proudest ever moment was when I was inducted into the WWE Hall of Fame.

JIM ROSS:
I echo those sentiments, King, I am proud to say that I am a WWE Hall of Famer.

The camera zooms in on the hands of JR and King that proudly display their WWE Hall of Fame rings that they are wearing tonight. The camera zooms back out as JR continues ...

JIM ROSS:
So, King, as we begin the long road down towards Atlanta, Georgia and WrestleMania 27, as we grow more and more excited over the matches we are going to witness when we get there, it’s time to find out just who will be inducted into the WWE Hall of Fame the night before WrestleMania 27 as an inductee of the ‘Class of 2011’ ...

JERRY LAWLER:
There are many suggestions over who could go in the Hall of Fame, JR, the fact is though, those that do need to have done that little bit extra for the business to set themselves apart. Less than 100 people have been inducted so far.

JIM ROSS:
The prestigious first inductee to the WWE Hall of Fame is to be announced right now, King. Here to announce it is the WWE owner ... Chip Butty.

*** POPPIHOLLA ***

*** CHIP BUTTY ***
Owner of the WWE​

Butty makes his way out – to a degree of heat – but he looks serious here tonight, there is no taunting of the crowd and he is holding a microphone as the WWE Hall of Fame logo appears on the titantron. The crowd, intelligently, realise that this is not Butty out here to taunt them, wind them up or to play the bad guy, this is Butty out here to announce the first inductee into the WWE Hall of Fame ... Butty steps into the ring and smiles as the camera focuses in on him.

CHIP BUTTY:
You know, guys, I’ve been in charge of the WWE for just over four months and I’ve seen a lot of things happen so far. It’s a job I’ve always dreamed of and it’s something that I’ve found to be a hell of a lot more difficult than I could have ever imagined. Yet, tonight, I have the pleasure of announcing the first inductee into the WWE Hall of Fame for 2011.

Applause for Butty from the fans ...

CHIP BUTTY:
When I bought the WWE back in September, I bought it from a man who I can only describe as a ‘legend’ ...

Cheers from the crowd as they realise early who this is going to be ...

CHIP BUTTY:
So let us find out right now ... the first inductee of the ‘Class of 2011’ in the WWE Hall of Fame is going to be ...

Attention turns towards the titantron and the video that is about to play ...

[YOUTUBE]OAqcUIkx3RI[/YOUTUBE]​

As the video ends, the first inductee of the ‘Class of 2011’ is confirmed on the titantron ...

*** VINCE McMAHON ***​

Appreciation is shown from the WWE Universe as they applaud and cheer and there is even a ‘Thank You, Vince!’ chant that goes up. Butty allows the applause and cheering to continue but when it fades, he begins to speak again ...

CHIP BUTTY:
Ladies and Gentlemen, let me run down some of this man’s accomplishments here in the WWE ... Vince McMahon was involved in the wrestling industry from 1969 when he helped his father, Vince McMahon Senior, to establish the WWWF as an announcer and as a promoter. He was the man responsible for the infamous match between the great Muhammad Ali ...(Huge cheers for Ali) ... and Antonio Inoki. Vince McMahon took control of the World Wrestling Federation and established it as a global product throughout the 1980’s as the business boomed, he created an event that has become the biggest event in the history of wrestling ... WrestleMania.

Cheers for the mention of Vince’s WrestleMania creation ...

CHIP BUTTY:
Between 1982 and 2011, Vince McMahon transformed the image of wrestling and oversaw the star power of greats like Hulk Hogan ... (Huge pop) ... Andre the Giant ... (Huge pop) ... Macho Man Randy Savage ... (Huge pop) ... Bret “The Hitman” Hart ... (Huge pop) Shawn Michaels ... (Huge pop) ... and The Rock ... (Huge pop) Vince McMahon adapted the WWF for different times and different eras, he saw it through a change of name and he became a millionaire of a multi-national company. The WWE is what it is today because of the business acumen of Vince McMahon!

More cheers ...

CHIP BUTTY:
However, Vince McMahon is not just a legendary businessman. He is also a legend out here, in the ring and at the announce table, he brought us Mr. McMahon, the owner of the company, the two time World Champion ... and the winner of the 1999 Royal Rumble. Mr. McMahon squared off against the greatest in the world at WrestleMania and, despite not being a professionally trained wrestler, he always delivered on the biggest stage. He was the larger than life evil Mr. McMahon, the man who fired legends, the man who forced people to kiss his ass and the man that had perhaps the greatest feud of all time here in the WWE ...

[YOUTUBE]qoHzfIVTCPo[/YOUTUBE]​

The video ends and there is a deafening applause in the arena ...

CHIP BUTTY:
Ladies and Gentlemen, it is an honour and privilege to announce that the prestigious first inductee in the ‘Class of 2011’ for the WWE Hall of Fame will be ... VINCE McMAHON!

Huge cheers from the WWE Universe, a worthy pick for the Hall of Fame it seems ... RAW heads into another commercial with the ‘Thank You, Vince!’ chant echoing around the arena here in Minneapolis tonight ...

*** COMMERCIAL BREAK ***​

RAW returns with the camera following chaos backstage here in the arena. We see two SMACKDOWN superstars out backstage – Big Show and Kofi Kingston and they are being restrained by security after it appears that an argument has begun. JR informs us that Big Show tried to assault Kofi but the Ghanaian managed to duck the shot and then he responded by laying into Show, the man who he has had numerous issues with recently. As the security continue to try and restrain them, Kofi taunts Show ...

KOFI KINGSTON:
Look at you, man! You’re a complete failure, a loser. You’re here on RAW, hand picked by John Cena and Michael Cole, you go out there to try and destroy Randy Orton and you get beat in less than five minutes?

Show roars in frustration at the words of Kofi and again tries to break through the security but he can’t ...

KOFI KINGSTON:
Face it, Show, you’re past your best! You like to throw your weight around and intimidate people but it’s not working no more. You can’t get the job done no more. It’ll be the same at the Elimination Chamber, typical Big Show ...

Kofi is laughing as he openly mocks Show now with the crowd laughing along with him here.

KOFI KINGSTON:
You’ll come out to the ring, you’ll roar a lot, you’ll throw a punch or two ... and then you’ll lose. Typical Big Show. And you know what, Show? This time, when you’re in the back, defeated and beaten again, I’ll still be in the ring, the last man to survive ... and I’ll become the new World Heavyweight Champion!

More roars of frustration from Show as Kofi voluntarily begins to move away as the camera focuses on the irate face of Show, Kofi has just wound him up big time here. As the camera focuses on his face, King questions whether that was a wise move from Kofi considering that he still has a match to come later tonight when he goes one on one with the RAW Money in the Bank contract holder, The Miz. The camera returns to the ring and it is time for the next match of the evening ...

*** METALINGUS ***

*** EDGE ***​

As his pyro explodes behind him, the opinionated Rated R Superstar paces towards the ring ready for action in a tag team match here tonight. JR reminds us that Edge is relying upon his partner, Sheamus, to help him succeed and qualify for the RAW Elimination Chamber match at the expense of Chris Jericho, one of his opponents tonight. Edge poses in the ring as the crowd boo him, they are not with him tonight ...

*** WRITTEN IN MY FACE ***

*** SHEAMUS ***
(w/Hornswoggle)​

The jeers and boos remain, possibly intensify, as the Celtic Warrior heads out onto the stage with the pint-sized troll, Hornswoggle, at his feet. After the past few months, in which Sheamus has elevated himself into the upper card here on RAW with controversial wins over Triple H, there are many people who fear that, according to JR, the Irishman could well get the win at the Elimination Chamber and secure himself a spot in the main event WWE Championship match at WrestleMania 27. Sheamus pounds at his chest once he enters the ring with Hornswoggle cheering him before he looks towards Edge and the two of them nod to each other in agreement as they prepare to greet their opposition here tonight ...

*** BREAK THE WALLS DOWN ***

*** CHRIS JERICHO ***​

Explosions signal the arrival of Y2J, the rock star, as he heads out towards the ring also looking to secure his place in the Chamber match in two weeks. Jericho looks pumped up as replays of Edge’s attack last week are shown before his comeback Codebreaker is also shown. As the camera returns to the ring, Jericho pauses on the ring steps and turns to wait for his partner tonight ...

*** RIDE OF THE VALKYRIES ***

*** DANIEL BRYAN ***​

Here comes the American Dragon, Daniel Bryan! A nice pop for Bryan as he sidesteps towards the ring pointing up to the ceiling, he looks positive about this match as well. As he approaches the ring, Bryan stares at Sheamus with a look of annoyance in his eyes – replays of Sheamus’ attack on him after Bryan beat Sheamus two weeks ago are shown. JR and King discuss the chances of Daniel Bryan as he faces Sheamus in the RAW Elimination Chamber match in thirteen days time – can Bryan upset the odds again and earn a shot at the WWE Championship at WrestleMania?

TAG TEAM MATCH – whichever team wins, Edge or Jericho to qualify for RAW Elimination Chamber match
CHRIS JERICHO & DANIEL BRYAN vs. EDGE & SHEAMUS (w/Hornswoggle)

Good tag team match that – for the early stages at least – keeps the main feuds separated as much as possible – Jericho and Edge are separate, so are Sheamus and Bryan. Sheamus’ power helps him begin to dominate over Jericho in the ring but the wily veteran is not as easy to keep down as he might appear and he is able to frustrate the big Celtic Warrior at every turn as he counters and reverses situations to keep himself in the match – a match he needs to win to qualify for the Chamber match. When Sheamus finally catches Y2J with an Irish Curse backbreaker, Edge suddenly wants to get involved and he makes a tag to come in after Jericho who he has had issues with recently. Edge hits the Edgeocution to Y2J but when he goes for the cover, he only manages to get a 2 count. Frustrated, Edge moves back and signals for his finisher – the Spear. The crowd chant for Y2J but he is getting up and is going to turn right into it despite the warnings of his partner, Bryan. Edge rushes across the ring but Jericho dodges and Edge eats the turnbuckle as Jericho dives over and makes the tag to Bryan. In comes Daniel with a running drop kick in the corner before he hits a forearm to knock Sheamus down as well to heighten the tension between those two further. Bryan connects with a German Suplex to Edge and holds on for a 2 count before a series of devastating kicks to the side of the head and shoulders put Edge down once more. Bryan is hot here and he tries to go for the Le Bell Lock but Edge is too strong and he resists and gets to the ropes. Reversing a whip to the ropes, Edge sends Bryan back first into the turnbuckle and goes running in after him ... Bryan gets the knees up and staggers Edge back again before slamming him down to the mat and heading for the top rope. Bryan dives off and hits a perfect Diving Headbutt before hooking the leg ... 1 ... 2 ... No! Edge kicks out at the last second. However, Bryan is not to be denied here and he immediately transitions himself and Edge ... LE BELL LOCK! BRYAN HAS THE LE BELL LOCK SUBMISSION HOLD ON EDGE IN THE MIDDLE OF THE RING! Edge is desperately crawling to the ropes but he is nowhere near and he is losing strength here, will he tap out? Edge is weakening now, Bryan pulls back harder and the tap out seems seconds away ... BAM! Vicious shot from Sheamus to break the hold and the crowd jeer these actions as they believe that Edge was beaten there! Bryan and Sheamus battle it out in the corner and the Irishman’s power gets the better of Bryan, he catches him in the ropes and thumps hard at his chest. As he ignores the referee’s appeal for him to exit the ring, Jericho reaches over and makes a tag to Bryan, he comes in and goes for Sheamus and knocks him down to the mat before hitting the Lionsault ... Sheamus rolls out of the ring and walks into Bryan who hits a double knee to the face of the Celtic Warrior as he comes flying off the apron. Jericho spins round in the ring though ... SPEAR! EDGE HITS THE SPEAR TO JERICHO! Edge hooks the leg but one of Jericho’s legs is under the bottom rope ...

** 1 **
** 2 **

** Jericho’s foot is on the ropes! **

** 3 **​

WINNER:
EDGE & SHEAMUS (7:03) via pinfall

Edge rolls out of the ring and away from the scene of the ‘crime’ with a smirk on his face as he backs up the ramp looking back at Jericho who is fuming. Jericho kicks at the ropes in frustration as he complains to the referee who signals that it is over – Edge wins and qualifies for the Elimination Chamber. Bryan joins Jericho’s protestations but they are falling on deaf ears as the referee didn’t see the foot on the ropes. Jericho, angry at Edge’s taunting from the ramp, quickly jumps through the ropes and makes off after Edge who disappears out of the arena. Bryan, looking annoyed, turns to leave as well ... BAM! BROGUE KICK! SHEAMUS DOWNS BRYAN ONCE AGAIN! As Daniel Bryan lays on his back on the mat, Sheamus stands over him and laughs – he looks super confident of himself as we head towards the Elimination Chamber, Hornswoggle too. JR suggests that Sheamus is the favourite heading into the Chamber and King can’t argue – it could be Sheamus challenging for the WWE Championship at WrestleMania!

*** COMMERCIAL BREAK ***​

 

[GCB]

(continued)​

RAW returns with Josh Mathews in the interview pit and he is preparing for an interview with somebody ...

JOSH MATHEWS:
Ladies and Gentlemen, please welcome my guest at this time ... the Number 1 contender for the United States Championship ... TED DIBIASE!

Into shot comes DiBiase, the Million Dollar Title over his shoulder, dressed in a suit and tie, he is not competing tonight it seems. DiBiase smirks as he awaits the question from the interviewer ...

JOSH MATHEWS:
Ted, at the Rumble, you beat Daniel Bryan and earned the chance to face United States Champion Justin Gabriel for the US Championship at a time of your choosing. Can you indicate when you are planning to challenge Justin?

DiBiase fiddles with the Million Dollar Championship before answering ...

TED DIBIASE:
Josh, haven’t you worked it out? When would be the best time to challenge Gabriel for the US Championship? Let me think ... What about ... Elimination Chamber? After all, then I can embarrass him on PPV, take his title and send him away back to South Africa where he belongs!

DiBiase looks as if he is making the Elimination Chamber match official – US Championship, Gabriel vs. DiBiase!

TED DIBIASE:
Just look at the champions here on RAW for a moment. WWE Champion? British. Tag Team Champions? British. Divas Champion? French Canadian. US Champion? South African. Is it me or is there something wrong here, Josh? I’ve heard of the American Dream but this is simply and utterly ridiculous. The United States Championship is the worst of all – that needs an American champion that the people of the United States can be proud of.

Some cheers for this comment from the WWE Universe but DiBiase is about to spoil it ...

TED DIBIASE:
I don’t mean somebody like Daniel Bryan. I don’t mean people like Cryme Tyme or John Morrison. I don’t mean anybody that ever come from the state of Minnesota.

Jeers now for DiBiase as he offends crowd favourites and the state of Minnesota ...

TED DIBIASE:
The people of America need somebody like me – full of class, full of style, a wealthy man with an excellent dress sense -

DiBiase clears some dust off his lapels ...

TED DIBIASE:
... to be their champion. In two weeks at the Elimination Chamber, I will become the role model and champion that these people can be proud of, that these people can look up to and aspire to be. And Justin Gabriel, a street urchin from South Africa ...

Boos for this comment about Gabriel ...

TED DIBIASE:
... well, Gabriel will find out that this is my time here in the WWE and he can take himself back to his homeland safe in the knowledge that he has been beaten by a better man. Thank you, Josh.

Phony thanks given by DiBiase to the interviewer before he turns to leave and the cameras return to the ringside area where JR and King are sat with their eyebrows raised at DiBiase’s comments.

JIM ROSS:
Some interesting comments from Ted DiBiase, King, nevertheless, we are waiting for news from backstage about tonight’s main event ...

JERRY LAWLER:
What a huge main event it could turn out to be, JR. A ten man tag match between Nexus and John Morrison’s team – we already know that Morrison will be joined by Carlito, Gabriel and RVD but who will be the fifth member of the team?

JIM ROSS:
A big decision for John Morrison to make, the stakes are high for him here tonight – if he wins, the Nexus are barred from ringside when he challenges for the WWE Championship of Wade Barrett in two weeks at the Elimination Chamber ...

JERRY LAWLER:
That’s true, JR, but he has gambled his WWE Championship match in order to try and take out Nexus. If Morrison loses tonight, he joins Nexus and then forfeits his chance to challenge Barrett at all.

The camera switches backstage where we Morrison looking around frantically trying to find somebody to join his team here tonight on RAW. He doesn’t appear to be having much luck before the camera returns to the ring ...

*** S.O.S. ***

*** KOFI KINGSTON ***​

As Kofi bounds out for his match, JR and King discuss the ongoing rivalry between Kofi and Big Show whilst replays of their confrontation earlier tonight plays out – security surround them as we hear Kofi’s taunts to Show repeated. King suggests that Kofi needs to focus on the Chamber and his chance to win the World Championship rather than antagonise the Big Show but JR reminds us that Show has put Kofi through trouble recently and deserves to be stood up to. Kofi is in the ring grinning at the replay that has just aired on the titantron as he awaits his opponent tonight ...

*** AWESOME! ***

*** I CAME TO PLAY ***

*** THE MIZ ***
Money in the Bank contract holder​

Out strides Miz, already secure of his place in the RAW Elimination Chamber match, with a microphone in one hand and the Money in the Bank briefcase in the other. Miz is looking to the ring at Kofi thoughtfully with a look of incredulity in his eyes. Miz struts down to the ramp and holds up the microphone to signal for his music to be faded out ...

THE MIZ:
Really?

Miz’ catchphrase is repeated back to him by the WWE Universe ...

THE MIZ:
Really? REALLY? Tonight, two weeks before I earn the WrestleMania main event spot, I have to face this ... this ... this loser from SMACKDOWN? Really?

Jeers for Miz’ comment about Kofi being a loser ...

THE MIZ:
Everybody knows, Kofi, everybody knows that RAW is the A-show around here, everybody knows that SMACKDOWN is second rate. You’re claiming to be the next big thing here in the WWE, you seem to be on a roll, the WWE’s Breakout Star of 2010 ... but you’re doing it on the B-show? (More boos for Miz) SMACKDOWN doesn’t have any stars, Kofi. SMACKDOWN doesn’t have anybody worthy of being in a match with me. It’s high time that SMACKDOWN superstars stayed away from RAW where they simply don’t belong ...

JR apologises to the WWE Universe for Miz’ comments about SMACKDOWN and hypes up the show as being an excellent watch as Kofi watches Miz angrily as he climbs the ring steps ...

THE MIZ:
You need to calm yourself down, Kofi. Your career is not heading for the stars, your career is stagnating and you don’t even see it. You haven’t managed to win that World Championship despite numerous chances, you couldn’t win the Royal Rumble because I eliminated you ...

Kofi looks ready to snap here ...

THE MIZ:
Face it, Kofi, you’re going nowhere. And you think you can come here tonight and beat me? You think you can defeat the man who is a guaranteed WWE Champion of the future? Really, Kofi? Really?

Miz is laughing now at Kofi who is being restrained by the officials so that Miz can enter the ring ...

THE MIZ:
I don’t think you can, Kofi. You want to know why? (Kofi continues to be restrained) Because I’m the Miz ... And I’m ... AWWWWWWWWWWWWWWEEEESSSSOOOOMMMME!

Miz laughs once more as he tosses away the microphone and removes his shirt ready for action. The referee takes the briefcase away as JR and King run down Miz for his comments, they point out that both these men have been on an incredible roll of late and both could be the future of the WWE as we head towards WrestleMania and through 2011 ...

SINGLES MATCH
KOFI KINGSTON vs. THE MIZ

An even match between two of the WWE’s brightest young talents as Kofi Kingston locks up with Miz. The man who holds the Money in the Bank contract, Miz, seems to have control of the match when he manages to dodge an attempted Trouble in Paradise kick from Kofi around the 6:00 mark and he follows up with a backbreaker across the point of his knee followed by a twisting neckbreaker that leaves Kingston down on the mat. Miz is only able to pick up the 2 count but it gives him the upper hand and he begins to punish Kofi with several clotheslines in the corner as well as a boot to the face as he runs in on the Ghanaian in the corner of the ring. However, Miz is only able to get the 2 count and he frustratedly argues with the referee over it. Climbing to the top turnbuckle, Miz comes off and hits a Double Axe Handle to the head of Kofi, he makes another cover but again it is only good enough for a 2 count. As Kofi gets to his knees, Miz decides that it is time to finish things and he hits a DDT that crashes Kofi head first into the mat. Rather than make the pinfall though, Miz gets to his feet and stalks behind Kofi, out of sight, waiting for him to get to his feet. When Kofi does, Miz sneaks up behind him, locks up his arms ... Skull Crushing Finale? No! Kingston manages to elbow his way out of it and then takes advantage of the Miz’ momentary spin to leap up and hit an impressive standing drop kick to buy himself some time as Miz tumbles through the ropes.

Kofi rolls out of the ring and he chases after Miz before catching him near the announce desk. With the referee in pursuit, Kofi whips Miz hard into the barricades to the delight of the fans at ringside who cheer louder. The referee demands that Kofi gets the action back in the ring and Kofi seems to be accepting this idea when Miz charges at him looking for another boot to the face. Kofi ducks underneath but the referee isn’t so quick and he takes the boot of Miz hard into his face and is knocked down hard on the outside. With the referee down, the crowd get to their feet expecting something to happen. In the ring go Miz and Kingston and it is Kofi that gets the upper hand as he locks Miz up ... S.O. S! KOFI STRIKES WITH THE S.O.S TO MIZ! However, Kofi isn’t finished there as he takes a few moments to recover and then sneaks up on Miz and waits ... TROUBLE IN PARADISE! KOFI CONNECTS WITH A RIGHT BOOT TO THE FACE OF MIZ! Kofi hooks the leg and ... Nothing. No referee. Kofi realises where the referee is and he heads out to check on him now. Kofi is bent over the referee when there is a commotion in the crowd. Kofi gets back to his full height and then ... BOOM!

WEAPON OF MASS DESTRUCTION! THE WMD PUNCH FROM BIG SHOW! Kofi is out cold on the outside of the ring, Show has completely knocked him cold for the third or fourth week in succession. The crowd are booing but there is nothing that can be done, the referee didn’t see it. Show rolls a prone Kofi back into the ring and then shakes up the referee and rolls him back into the ring as well. Miz is amazed as he watches on, he isn’t prepared to stop this and he simply watches and waits ... As Show exits, Miz watches Kofi who is starting to stir again. Miz goes back to the referee and he manages to get the referee back to his knees, he can see what he is doing. Miz drags Kofi up, there is little point to this, he could pin Kofi already ... SKULL CRUSHING FINALE! MIZ HITS THE SKULL CRUSHING FINALE! Kofi’s already battered head hits the mat once more and Miz hooks the leg. Slowly, still a bit dazed, the referee makes the count ...

** 1 **
** 2 **
** 3 **​

WINNER:
THE MIZ (8:43) via pinfall

Replays of Big Show’s involvement in the match are shown as we see the WMD punch that knocked down Kofi Kingston as he was getting to his feet – JR and King are outraged by the cheap shot and they run down Show for it. Replays of Miz taking advantage are shown and the announcers bemoan the fact that Show interfered in a high quality match between two of the best young stars in the WWE and that they wouldn’t see a true result. King suggests that the win is tarnished for Miz but he is backing away up the ramp looking delighted to have got another win – his undefeated streak in 2011 continues. Can Miz earn the chance to battle for the WWE Championship at WrestleMania?

*** COMMERCIAL BREAK ***​

RAW returns with huge news from SMACKDOWN General Manager Michael Cole – this Friday on SMACKDOWN, Big Show and Kofi Kingston will finally compete one on one in a match as their grudge comes to a head ...

*** FRIDAY NIGHT SMACKDOWN LIVE ***

BIG SHOW

vs.

KOFI KINGSTON​

JR and King are happy about the match made – King begrudgingly praises Michael Cole – and the chance to see Kofi get revenge on Show for interfering in his match tonight before the break. Another replay of Show’s WMD punch is shown before the camera switches to the locker room where Kurt Angle and his new team, Team Angle 2, are stood talking. Percy Watson and Joe Hennig appear to be listening intently to advice from Kurt ...

KURT ANGLE:
You’ve done everything I’ve asked so far, you’ve listened to everything I’ve told you. You’ve taken my 3 I’s on board – intelligence, integrity and intensity. I’m happy with you both so far but tonight, tonight, you need to prove that you are worth your place with an Olympic Gold Medal winner. You need to prove your worth tonight.

Hennig and Watson nod their heads, they are pumped up for tonight as they face Triple H in a Handicap Match – if Triple H wins, he qualifies for the RAW Elimination Chamber match and has a chance to deny Angle his chance to go to WrestleMania.

KURT ANGLE:
I’ve been screwed by Triple H enough in my career, he cost me a shot at the Undisputed Championship back at WrestleMania 18 and I don’t want to give him the chance to do it again. Guys, you must stop him getting into the Chamber match, I’m counting on you.

Both Watson and Hennig again nod their heads at Kurt ...

KURT ANGLE:
You’ve got to do whatever it takes to get the 3-count and get the job done. I know you can do it. Good luck, guys.

The three of them slap hands and then Joe Hennig and Percy Watson exit the locker room with Angle watching them leave with a look of slight concern in his eyes. Does he really trust his new recruits to get the job done tonight? Why is he so desperate to deny Triple H a place in the match? The camera switches back to the ring and the arrival of the afore-mentioned ‘Game’ ...

*** TIME TO PLAY THE GAME ***

*** TRIPLE H ***​

The crowd pops big time for the arrival of the ‘Cerebral Assassin’ as he heads out into the spotlight looking ready to fight and earn his place in the Chamber. JR and King hype up the fact that Hunter has been in more Chamber matches than anybody and that he has been victorious in the monstrous structure before – King suggests that is why Angle doesn’t want him in the match in two weeks time. Triple H jumps on the apron and spits water into the air as the lights return and then he jumps up the ropes to salute the crowd with a look of intensity in his eyes as he prepares for another difficult task here ...

*** MEDAL ***

*** TEAM ANGLE 2 ***
Joe Hennig
Percy Watson​

Boos for the newest team here on RAW as the two rookies head out dressed in red, white and blue and looking nervous as they head towards the ring. As they approach the ring, JR informs us of their history so far – he tells us about Hennig’s famous father, the legendary Mr. Perfect, and his training from legends like Harley Race and Brock Lesnar before moving on to Watson and his football experiences in the NFL before he joined the WWE. Hennig and Watson step into the ring and Hunter, a veteran here, stares at them as if trying to intimidate them. The referee signals for the bell – can Triple H overcome the numbers and earn his spot in the Elimination Chamber at the second time of asking?

2 vs. 1 HANDICAP MATCH – if Triple H wins, he qualifies for the RAW Elimination Chamber match
JOE HENNIG & PERCY WATSON (Team Angle 2) vs. TRIPLE H

Triple H is clearly the better of the three wrestlers and, in the early stages of the match, he manages to hold his own against two men as he alternates between the pair of them, handing them an harsh lesson in the ways of the WWE. However, the numbers game eventually catches up with Hunter as he attempts to his a Pedigree on Percy Watson. Joe Hennig manages to sneak up behind him and he hits a German Suplex that gets a 2 count, the surprise of it adding to Hunter’s problem when kicking out. Hennig calls out to his team-mate and they appear to be reinvigorated as they now lay a beating on the Cerebral Assassin. Watson gets to his feet and he punches Triple H over and over as Hennig restrains him. Watson pops Hunter into the ropes and then leaves him to Hennig who scoops him up – Side Slam Backbreaker over his knee. Triple H writhes in pain but there is no end in sight as he is dragged back to his feet and Watson lifts him up into a Fireman’s Carry and then drops him in a Flapjack move. On commentary, JR refers to this Fireman Carry Flapjack as Percycution and says he was informed of it earlier. Watson makes the cover but it is only going to be a 2. Now, Hennig decides he needs to try something bigger. He drags Triple H up and hits a Cradle Suplex where he bridges immediately into the cover ... 1 ... 2 ... No! Triple H is fighting hard as Watson and Hennig hit their best shots ... Frustration on the face of Hennig but he is determined, as his Watson, they want to get a huge win here on RAW tonight. Hennig whips Hunter to the ropes once more, he catches him and hits an Atomic Drop but he doesn’t release Hunter immediately and Watson hits a running drop kick to Triple H as well ... This time, surely? Hennig rolls Hunter up with both legs ... 1 ... 2 ... No! Triple H kicks out again!

The frustration on the faces of Watson and Hennig are clear now and they both hold their heads wondering what they need to do to beat Triple H here. Large boos go up from the crowd though as somebody is heading ringside ...

Kurt Angle is coming out here to keep an eye on his team, Team Angle, he gets to the edge of the ring and he calms his men down and encourages them to keep going. Hennig grabs Triple H by the head as he gets to his knees and sets for a suplex but Hunter blocks it and refuses to be suplexed. In the end, HHH wriggles clear and he hits right hands to Hennig before ducking his attempted shot ... As Hennig comes off the ropes, Triple H lifts him up ... Spinebuster! Watson attacks from behind but Trips has found a second wind here as he looks to qualify for the RAW Chamber match. As Watson goes for a Stinger splash in the corner, Hunter moves out of the way and kicks him in the gut ... PEDIGREE! TRIPLE H PEDIGREES PERCY WATSON! Triple H makes the cover and hooks the leg ... 1 ... 2 ... No! Hennig drags Triple H out of the ring by his legs and shoulder barges him into the ring steps. Watson is down and out in the ring and the referee orders Hennig back in. The distraction to the referee by Hennig means that we now have 3 vs. 1 ... Angle laying down the stomps and right hands to Triple H – not very Olympic like as JR points out. Angle rolls Triple H back into the ring as the referee turns, he looks to Angle suspiciously but says nothing, Hennig is booting the hell out Hunter now. Hunter is down on the mat and Hennig climbs to the top rope ... Diving Elbow! Misses! Hunter moves away at the last second and Hennig smashes down hard on the mat before rolling away. Kurt looks on worried as Hunter recovers, Watson still down from the Pedigree. Suddenly, Hennig is back in the ring with a steel chair! The referee goes towards him and demands he get rid of it but Hennig is having none of it and he tries to get past the referee who holds him back a little. A struggle ensues, Hennig drops the chair and then Triple H grabs him ... PEDIGREE! TRIPLE H PEDIGREES JOE HENNIG! Triple H makes a cover but the ref is climbing out of the ring to hand the chair back to the ringkeeper ...

ANGLE SLAM! TRIPLE H DRAGGED UP AND ANGLE SLAMMED BY KURT ANGLE!

Boos echo around the arena as the referee comes back into the ring. Hennig is down and out, Hunter is down and out, Watson crawls over and flops down on top of the Game ...

** 1 **
** 2 **
** 3 **​

WINNER:
JOE HENNIG & PERCY WATSON (6:47) via pinfall

In the ring, Triple H looks furious as he has been screwed once more by Kurt Angle! Angle and his victorious boys are halfway up the ramp, huge smiles on their faces, they reach the stage and mock Hunter in the ring who looks almost ready to pop with rage. JR and King discuss the actions of Angle and his desperation to keep Hunter out of the Elimination Chamber – it appears he has now accomplished his goal and done just that! As RAW heads into the penultimate commercial of the night, Triple H is shown looking angrily out at the trio of Angle, Hennig and Watson as they look down to him from the stage, he has failed again to qualify for the Chamber. Who will take the last remaining spot in the RAW Chamber match though?

*** COMMERCIAL BREAK ***​

 

[GCB]

(continued)​

RAW returns with Josh Mathews stood backstage with the Number 1 contender for the WWE Championship – John Morrison. Beside him are the trio of Carlito, Justin Gabriel and Rob Van Dam, three members of his team tonight as he goes up against Nexus to try and take them out of the WWE Championship match in two weeks time. However, there is no sign of a fifth member of the team ...

JOSH MATHEWS:
John, can you tell us who is your fourth team-mate for tonight’s match?

Morrison pulls a face and then responds ...

JOHN MORRISON:
Josh, unfortunately, I’ve been unable to find anybody else to join my team tonight that I can trust or who hasn’t competed tonight already. Therefore, it looks like we’re going to have to go out there, just the four of us, and face Nexus with one man less than ...

???:
Bro, bro ... Wait up!

The camera spins around and we see Zack Ryder jogging up towards Morrison and his team. He receives a small pop from the crowd after his turn recently and his issues with Hawkins and Swagger over on SMACKDOWN.

ZACK RYDER:
Look, bro, I know we haven’t always seen eye to eye on things but tonight, let me join your team, let me help you defeat Nexus.

Morrison looks reluctant and turns to the other members of his team.

ZACK RYDER:
I’m different now, bro. The stuff that’s been happening with me and my former Broski, Curt Hawkins, it has made me see sense. I need to make an impact now, I need a chance to compete here on RAW. Come on, John, you know it makes sense. You can trust me ...

Morrison smiles and decides to trust Ryder ...

JOHN MORRISON:
What the hell, Zack, you can join my team. Don’t let me down though ... bro!

ZACK RYDER:
Yes! Thanks, bro, I won’t let you down. Woo Woo Woo ... You Know It!

Ryder’s goofy grin confirms his spot on the team and the camera returns to the ring as Ryder and Morrison shake hands ... The arena lights flash yellow and here come Wade Barrett and his team.

*** WE ARE ONE ***

*** NEXUS ***​

Led as ever by the smug looking Wade Barrett, Nexus head down the ramp and towards the ring with the WWE Championship over the shoulder of their leader. Into the ring clamber Slater, Otunga, Sheffield and Jackson before Barrett follows them and they stand and raise their hands – seemingly oblivious to the jeers they are receiving from the WWE Universe. JR and King discuss the comments of Morrison earlier and a replay of their confrontation is shown ...

WADE BARRETT:
You see, I know what you claimed last week. You claimed that without these four men behind me, without Justin Gabriel, I would not be the WWE Champion. You could not be further from the truth, Morrison. These men here stand behind me and they know their role in the Nexus. They know that I am the best in the WWE, they know that I deserve to be the WWE Champion.

More raised eyebrows behind Barrett – it appears that he isn’t speaking the complete truth right now!

WADE BARRETT:
I am the leader of the Nexus, Morrison, because I have earned their respect. I won NXT, I earned these men’s respect and they follow my lead as we dominate RAW and the WWE. Without them, would I be WWE Champion? Of course I would be. But I am thankful for the support they give me as I look to shut people like you up.

Barrett and Nexus are now stood at the foot of the ramp. Barrett orders Nexus’ four members to make their way around the ring – Jackson, Otunga, Sheffield and Slater spread out on all four sides – before Barrett steps up the ring steps and through the ropes. He now stands opposite Morrison who is eying the Nexus around the ring with a wary look in his eye. JR and King suggest he needs to get out of there as soon as he can.

WADE BARRETT:
You see, Morrison, I have done in six months what you couldn’t do in six years. I have won the big one, I am the WWE Champion. I will be the WWE Champion at WrestleMania, I will be the WWE Champion for a long time. At Elimination Chamber, Morrison, it will be a walk in the park. I don’t need Nexus to beat you. Nexus will be with me for support only ...

JOHN MORRISON:
Is that a fact?

Barrett looks annoyed by the interruption.

JOHN MORRISON:
Why don’t you back up that claim then, Wade? If you don’t need Nexus, why don’t you prove it? Come out to the ring at Elimination Chamber, come out and face me like a man. One on one?

Barrett smirks once more and laughs in Morrison’s face.

WADE BARRETT:
Is there something wrong with your ears? I’ve just told you, I don’t need Nexus but they will want to be out there to support their leader and I am not going to stop them from doing that.

The camera catches David Otunga looking a little annoyed about something as he narrows his eyes whilst looking into the ring ...

JOHN MORRISON:
Wade, if you are the leader that you say you are, why don’t we do something about this? How about a match tonight?

Cheers from the WWE Universe.

JOHN MORRISON:
How about we have ourselves a match tonight? I’ll find four guys backstage that are willing to team with me to face you and your Nexus here tonight? And if I win, Wade, Nexus are barred from ringside at the Elimination Chamber!

Cheers for this idea, Barrett smirks at it.

WADE BARRETT:
Do you think that will help your chances, Morrison? Trust me, it won’t. I accept your challenge ... (Morrison smiles) ... on one condition!

Morrison’s expression changes slightly as he waits for Barrett to explain ...

WADE BARRETT:
You see, Morrison, Elimination Chamber will be a walk in the park for me. The only danger for me at the Chamber will be injury before WrestleMania 27. The only thing easier than facing you ... would be to have the night off.

Boos and jeers for the comments of Barrett ...

WADE BARRETT:
So, that is the deal, Morrison. If you and your team win, Nexus is barred from ringside. If Nexus win ... you join Nexus and you forfeit the match to me at the Chamber.

Morrison looks angry over the condition but he nods his head ...

JOHN MORRISON:
You’re on, Wade. I will find a team and we will beat you tonight. When tonight is over, Nexus will play no part in our match at the Chamber. And your title, Wade, your title will be in more danger than it has ever been.

Cheers for the determined words of Morrison, can he find a team to banish Nexus from the ring tonight?

WADE BARRETT:
I don’t think so, Morrison. You see, Nexus are more united than ever. Tonight, the Nexus gets a new member ... and I get the night off in two weeks time. Because, Morrison ... (Boos echo around the arena as Barrett looks out to the four men on the four different sides of the ring) ... you’re either Nexus ...

Wade Barrett smirks and beckons the four men to enter the ring; all four of them step up onto the apron and the situation becomes increasingly threatening for the Number 1 contender ...

WADE BARRETT:
... or you’re against us.

The replay ends and we see Nexus stood in the ring ready and waiting for their opponents tonight ...

*** COOL ***

*** CARLITO ***​

First up for Team Morrison, the Caribbean Carlito heads out with an apple in his hand and heads towards the ring. He pauses at the foot of the ramp and sensibly waits for some back-up from his other team-mates first ...

*** ONE OF A KIND ***

*** ROB VAN DAM ***​

The ECW legend heads out to the ring looking super confident as usual and greets the sound of his name being announced with his thumbs in the air as usual ...

*** AFRICA RISING ***

*** JUSTIN GABRIEL ***
United States Champion​

The United States Championship around his waist, Gabriel heads out into the arena to join Carlito and RVD as JR and King remind us that Ted DiBiase announced earlier tonight that Gabriel would defend the title against him at the Elimination Chamber PPV in two weeks time. JR and King also speak of the strange happenings between Gabriel and the Nexus in the Royal Rumble where Sheffield, Jackson, Otunga and Slater all refused to touch him during the match.

*** RADIO ***

*** ZACK RYDER ***​

The final member of the team to join heads out looking delighted to be on RAW and ready for action. With a headband around his head, Ryder punches the air and shouts ‘Woo! Woo! Woo!’ – some of the crowd begin to chant along with him although many are still viewing him with indecision after his recent run as the Tag Team Champion ...

*** AIN'T NO MAKE BELIEVE ***

*** JOHN MORRISON ***​

Out strides Morrison with the slo-mo camera switched on and the pyro lights up behind him as he heads for the ring for one of the biggest matches of his career. JR suggests that this match is as important as the actual title match at the PPV – if Morrison can get Nexus banned from the ring, his chances of winning the WWE Championship will significantly improve. However, King reminds us of Morrison’s gamble – if he loses tonight, he joins Nexus and forfeits his chance. Morrison joins his team at the foot of the ramp and they slide into the ring ready for action ...

10 MAN TAG TEAM MATCH – if Team Morrison win, Nexus banned from ringside for WWE Title match at Elimination Chamber; if Nexus win, Morrison joins Nexus
NEXUS (Wade Barrett, David Otunga, Ezekiel Jackson, Heath Slater & Skip Sheffield) vs. John Morrison, Carlito, Justin Gabriel, RVD & Zack Ryder

Usual large tag team match in the early stages with lots of quick tags and cheating from the heel team – in this case, Nexus. Morrison is agitated throughout as he knows how important this match is to him here tonight. The most important part of the first half of the match comes when Justin Gabriel tags into the match for Team Morrison – Heath Slater, the Nexus legal man at this point, steps back with his hands up. A stand off occurs as Slater clearly doesn’t want to fight with Gabriel here ... Why not?! Slater looks for a tag to one of his team-mates but none of them appear to want the tag either. Skip Sheffield refuses, Ezekiel Jackson does, so does David Otunga. Barrett wants nothing to do with Gabriel either but he is the only one who stays on the apron as Sheffield, Otunga and Big Zeke all drop to the floor out of the way. Barrett looks down at them confused but then Slater tags himself out and Barrett in as he tags the shoulder of the Nexus leader ... Gabriel fair drags Barrett into the ring and starts battering him with forearms before whipping him to a neutral corner. He hits a running drop kick to the WWE Champion, climbs the ropes and, as Barrett staggers back around, Gabriel leaps off ... Hurricanrana! Barrett rolls out of the ring to safety as Gabriel dares the rest of Nexus to get into the ring but they all refuse as RAW heads into the final commercial of the evening ...

*** COMMERCIAL BREAK ***​

A replay is shown of Gabriel getting distracted by the rest of Nexus – he is trying to get them to come in and fight him – and this allows Barrett to sneak up behind him and kick him in the gut as he spins round ... Powerbomb! It isn’t enough for a 3 count though, to Morrison’s relief, and Barrett goes to tag Nexus in ... again, they all refuse. This allows Gabriel time to crawl away as Barrett barks orders to his men ... Gabriel tags in Morrison who comes rushing over and jumps Barrett from behind. However, as Barrett stumbles, Ezekiel Jackson gets the tag – now that Gabriel is out? – and he begins to drag Morrison away from the WWE Champion. Jackson begins to hit powerslams on Morrison and then he makes a cover ... 2 count! Morrison is looking to tag back out now but Jackson continues to use his size and power to work on Morrison as he weakens him up with stiff kicks to the knee. Morrison wildly swings at Jackson but misses and Big Zeke scoops him up ... TORTURE RACK! JACKSON LOCKS ON THE TORTURE RACK TO MORRISON! Morrison battles wildly and manages to escape down Zeke’s back but he is caught with a huge clothesline from the Guyanan that turns him inside out. Barrett shouts now and demands to be tagged in but Jackson doesn’t want to tag out now. Barrett steps through the ropes and jabs at Jackson’s chest, he is showing his leadership here as he demands to be tagged in when he wants. Barrett spins and barks orders to all the other three members of Nexus too – he is clearly heard to shout “I’m in charge!” Jackson does as he is asked and he tags Barrett who nods his head in thanks. However, Morrison has tagged in Ryder now and he rushes over ... Barrett spins round ... ROUGH RYDER! RYDER TAKES DOWN THE WWE CHAMPION! Barrett is hurt now and Zack makes the cover ... 1 ... 2 ... No! Barrett shows his guts as he kicks out and then stretches for a tag ...

NEXUS HAVE JUST JUMPED DOWN OFF THE APRON!

There is nobody there for a tag as Barrett reaches to his corner. What are Nexus doing? Skip Sheffield, David Otunga, Heath Slater and Ezekiel Jackson are all slowly backing away from the ring and towards the ramp as Barrett slumps in the corner watching them. Ryder flashes the L.I symbol with his fingers as Barrett watches his team-mates as they seem to be deserting him! BROSKI BOOT! RYDER WITH THE BROSKI BOOT! Ryder skips over and tags in Carlito to cheers. He watches Nexus moving further away from the ring, chuckles and waits as Barrett gets up ... BACKSTABBER! CARLITO WITH THE BACKSTABBER TO BARRETT! Nexus are up on the stage now, they are walking out on Wade Barrett, their leader, the WWE Champion, the founder of the Nexus! Carlito tags in RVD who climbs the ropes ... FIVE STAR FROG SPLASH! RVD smashes down on Barrett, it’s all over now, surely? RVD drags Barrett to the Morrison corner and tags in Justin Gabriel who smirks as he climbs the ropes ... 450 SPLASH! GABRIEL HITS BARRETT WITH THE 450 SPLASH! A move that used to be one of the Nexus’ signature moves is now used on the Nexus leader! Gabriel grins as he looks down on Barrett and then tags in the Number 1 contender to Barrett’s WWE Championship at Elimination Chamber! Here comes John Morrison! He waits and waits as he watches Barrett struggling on the mat ... A quick glance to the stage where Nexus remain, Morrison rushes over at Barrett ... CHUCK KICK! MORRISON CHUCK KICK’S THE WWE CHAMPION! Morrison makes the cover ...

** 1 **
** 2 **
** 3 **​

WINNER:
JOHN MORRISON, CARLITO, JUSTIN GABRIEL, RVD & ZACK RYDER (11:27) via pinfall

JOHN MORRISON HAS PINNED THE WWE CHAMPION! Nexus watch on from the stage as Morrison celebrates his victory over Barrett – in the end, it was easy but that doesn’t change the fact that the odds were dramatically cut on a Morrison win at Elimination Chamber in the last ten minutes. However, even bigger news – what on earth happened with Nexus and their walkout on their leader? Barrett has rolled out of the ring after taking the best shots of Team Morrison and sits up leaning against the ring steps for support as he looks up the ramp towards the rest of his team with a look on shock and anger on his face. It seems that there are going to be no answers here as the other four members of Nexus turn on their heel and walk off the stage and out of view to leave a bewildered Barrett looking on with no clue. In the ring, Morrison shakes hands with the rest of his team and even has a hug for his new ‘broski’ Ryder as RAW ends with JR and King hyping up the improvement in Morrison’s chances at Elimination Chamber as a result of this win ...

*** END OF SHOW ***

=========================================

ELIMINATION CHAMBER 2011
*** CONFIRMED MATCHES ***

GRUDGE MATCH
John Cena vs. Randy Orton

SMACKDOWN ELIMINATION CHAMBER MATCH FOR THE WORLD CHAMPIONSHIP
CM Punk (c) vs. Big Show vs. Kofi Kingston vs. Jeff Hardy vs. Christian vs. The Undertaker

RAW ELIMINATION CHAMBER MATCH TO DETERMINE #1 CONTENDER FOR WWE CHAMPIONSHIP AT WRESTLEMANIA 27
Daniel Bryan vs. Kurt Angle vs. The Miz vs. Sheamus vs. Edge vs. ???

WWE CHAMPIONSHIP
Wade Barrett (c) vs. John Morrison
(Nexus barred from ringside)

UNITED STATES CHAMPIONSHIP
Justin Gabriel (c) vs. Ted DiBiase

DIVAS CHAMPIONSHIP
Maryse (c) vs. Layla vs. Michelle McCool (?)

*** SUNDAY 20TH FEBRUARY LIVE AND EXCLUSIVE ON PAY PER VIEW ***​

​

 

[GCB]

NXT
SEASON 3, EPISODE 7

BRADLEY CENTER, MILWAUKEE, WISCONSIN
TUESDAY FEBRUARY 8TH, 2011​

Last week on NXT, we saw the first person eliminated from the competition as Dolph Ziggler defeated MVP and consigned the Ballin’ Superstar to the WWE history books. Elimination from the NXT competition means, of course, that MVP’s time in the WWE is over. As for Ziggler and the other six remaining participants, things now get serious. At the moment, Great Khali is leading the way but – as NXT reaches the halfway stage tonight – he is there to be shot at. After Week 6, the standings stand as follows:

*** RANKINGS AFTER WEEK 6 ***

** 1 **
Great Khali

** 2 **
Vladimir Kozlov

** 3 **
Chavo Guerrero

** 4 **
Drew McIntyre

** 5 **
R-Truth

** 6 **
Dolph Ziggler

** 7 **
Kaval

** ALREADY ELIMINATED **
MVP (Week 6)​

Of course, the rankings don’t tell the whole story – Kaval currently sits in last position in the rankings but he is actually the only one secure of his place on NXT right now. After winning the NXT Battle Royal at the Rumble, Kaval won the right to immunity from the first two eliminations meaning that he is guaranteed to survive past the Elimination Chamber PPV. Can the same be said for any of the other NXT competitors?

SECOND NXT ELIMINATION MATCH NEXT WEEK: The show began with news from NXT announcer Matt Striker that next week’s edition of NXT would feature the second NXT Elimination match between the lowest ranked, eligible competitors. Striker informed the audience that – as it stands – that would be Dolph Ziggler, who survived the Elimination match last week, and R-Truth, both members of Team Rock – or Team Rock and Sock as they are now known. Striker went on to inform everybody that both Ziggler and Truth would have chance to escape the elimination places as they would face the two men immediately above them in the rankings: Ziggler will face Chavo Guerrero tonight as well as R-Truth going up against Drew McIntyre. If Ziggler and Truth can win their matches, they would escape the danger spots and would send their opponents into the Elimination match next week. As for the other three men remaining in the NXT competition, Great Khali, Vladimir Kozlov and Kaval, they would be involved in a Tag Team match. To open the show, Striker introduced Khali and Kaval first and then Kozlov with ... Cody Rhodes from SMACKDOWN.

Great Khali (1) & Kaval (7) vs. Cody Rhodes and Vladimir Kozlov (2): The big man – small man combination of Khali and Kaval take the adulation of the crowd as they look to get the win over the Russian and the arrogant, cocky Rhodes. The power of Khali and the speed and agility of Kaval allow them to take control and they manage to take down their opponents over and over again until Kozlov manages to get back at Kaval with a headbutt to his chest as he comes off the top rope. This leads to a period of dominance from Kozlov as he frustrates Khali by keeping Kaval away from the tag. In the end, Kaval makes the hot tag and Khali comes in and uses the Khali Chop to knock down Kozlov and Rhodes for a close 2 count on Cody – Kozlov making the save just in time. Kozlov also denies Khali once more as he looks to hit the Punjabi Plunge on Kaval and this leads to the two big men battling out of the ring, the men ranked one and two trading punches. As Khali exits, Kaval gets the blind tag and he comes in and attacks Cody but the SMACKDOWN star gets a reversal and hits the CROSS RHODES ... 1 ... 2 ... 3!

WINNER:​

​

Cody Rhodes & Vladimir Kozlov​

MVP FAREWELL: After the break, MVP, the man eliminated last week, heads out into the arena for his final appearance in the WWE. He thanks the WWE Universe for all their support during his time in the WWE as well as Teddy Long, the man who hired him in the first place. MVP says that he is devastated to have lost last week and he wishes he could have beaten Ziggler if only to get rid of Vickie Guerrero. As MVP tries to continue, out comes his mentor, JBL, to interrupt. JBL tells MVP that in his early days on SMACKDOWN, JBL looked out for him and helped him, he never gave MVP any bad advice. In truth, MVP couldn’t have wished for a better mentor than him but he didn’t listen to him, he didn’t follow his advice and instructions and now he only has himself to blame for his elimination from NXT. MVP angrily reacts and tells JBL that he has more class than to run around ganging up on somebody just because of his size which is what JBL expected him to do. He says that Kozlov and McIntyre might be stupid enough to follow those kind of orders but he has principles ... JBL cuts him off. He says that if MVP had ganged up on Kaval at the Royal Rumble, as he told him to, then Kaval would have never won the Battle Royal. If that hadn’t happened, Kaval wouldn’t have got the immunity and then MVP would never have ended up in the Elimination match last week. JBL says that MVP is out of NXT for one reason – his own stupidity. JBL leaves and then MVP speaks up once more. He says he isn’t out of NXT because of stupidity, he is out here because of his pride and because he simply came up short. MVP thanks the fans one more time and then takes his leave from the NXT competition ... and the WWE.

Alicia Fox vs. Michelle McCool (w/Kharma):After Chip Butty’s announcement a fortnight ago is replayed, we are reminded that McCool needs to win two more matches, including tonight, in order to get into the Divas Championship Triple Threat match at the Elimination Chamber PPV. Replays of McCool’s wins in the last two weeks are shown before we head into the match tonight. McCool makes short work of Alicia Fox after another little distraction from Kharma ... WINGS OF LOVE! ... 1 ... 2 ... 3!

WINNER:​

​

Michelle McCool​

Michelle McCool takes one step closer to the Divas Championship as she gets another big win. She now will face one more match next week on Episode 8 of NXT and one more win will mean that she will challenge Divas Champion Maryse and former champion and Laycool partner, Layla, in a Triple Threat match. Striker and Josh Mathews remind us that McCool and Kharma viciously beat Maryse and Layla at the Rumble but then informs us that they will return to the WWE next week on NXT to see if McCool can earn her spot in the title match.

Drew McIntyre (4) vs. R-Truth (5):Here is R-Truth’s chance to get out of 5th spot and the danger zone as he goes up against Drew McIntyre. If he can beat the Sinister Scotsman, it will be McIntyre who will be in the Elimination match next week on NXT instead. McIntyre dominates as the crowd rally around Truth but they can’t inspire him to make a comeback until he finally counters as Drew goes for the Future Shock DDT. R-Truth reverses into a jawbreaker and then hits the Scissors Kick as he looks to get the big win. The crowd chant along as the referee counts ... 1 ... 2 ... McINTYRE KICKS OUT JUST IN TIME! The crowd are disappointed but Truth goes back to the Scot and looks to hit another big move but McIntyre manages to counter ... FUTURE SHOCK DDT! It’s over! McIntyre hooks the leg ... 1 ... 2 ... 3!

WINNER:​

​

Drew McIntyre​

Drew McIntyre remains fourth in the NXT rankings as a result of the victory whilst R-Truth stays fifth and confirms that he will be in next week’s match to determine the second elimination from NXT! Truth is disappointed but he steels himself – he has one last chance next week to save his NXT chances and his career in the WWE ...

MICK FOLEY UPDATE ON THE ROCK: Foley apologises for taking up time on the show and commiserates with Truth’s loss to McIntyre earlier tonight. He says he realises that next week will now feature two members of his team – Truth vs. Ziggler or Chavo, all three are on Team Rock – but he is sure that after the elimination, he will be able to inspire the remaining two to challenge for victory. Foley says that “Team Rock n Sock” will win NXT for The Rock who has been advised to remain away from the WWE indefinitely as he recovers from a severe concussion. Foley suggests that WrestleMania is the grandest stage of them all and only The Rock can electrify that event – he is sure Rock will be back in time to inspire his team and to kick JBL’s ‘candy ass’ all over WrestleMania 27.

MAIN EVENT – Chavo Guerrero (3) vs. Dolph Ziggler (6):Before the match, Striker and Mathews remind us of the little sub-plot behind this match after the words of Dolph Ziggler’s associate Vickie Guerrero when she slammed Chavo and declared him a disgrace to the Guerrero name. Vickie reinforces this as she speaks ill of Chavo before the match and she vows that Ziggler will defeat him tonight. With third spot on the line, Chavo and Dolph go at it and they have a good back and forth match, both men desperate to win and avoid facing R-Truth in a battle to the end next week. Chavo tries to rub Vickie’s nose in it as he goes for the Frog Splash used so effectively by his Uncle Eddie but Ziggler moves out of the way late and Chavo hits the mat hard. Getting to his feet dazed, Ziggler catches Chavo and locks on the Sleeper hold. Chavo’s struggles to get out of it but he isn’t able to. Ziggler keeps it locked in and Chavo falls to his knees, will he pass out? Guerrero hears the backing of the crowd and he desperately tries to fight to his feet one last time ... He jumps up and pushes off the top turnbuckle with his feet, rolling back, Ziggler is trapped and his shoulders are down ... 1 ... 2 ... ZIGGLER JUST KICKS OUT! Chavo can’t believe it but he kicks Ziggler in the gut and then slams him down to the mat before heading to the corner again. Vickie jumps up on the apron and drags his foot back, Chavo manages to shake her off and the referee orders her away but Ziggler pounces and knocks Chavo’s feet from under him. Chavo crotches himself on the top buckle and then falls forward, stumbling off the ropes. He staggers to his feet and turns ... ZIG ZAG! ZIGGLER HITS THE ZIG ZAG TO CHAVO! Dolph makes the cover as Vickie counts along ... 1 ... 2 ... 3!

WINNER:​

​

Dolph Ziggler​

The result means that Ziggler has taken Chavo’s third place in the rankings by defeating the Mexican. However, this means that Chavo drops into Ziggler’s sixth place and that means that next week’s Elimination match will feature R-Truth vs. Chavo Guerrero, one of these two men will be eliminated from NXT and WWE next week!

*** RANKINGS AFTER WEEK 7 ***

** 1 **
Great Khali

** 2 **
Vladimir Kozlov

** 3 **
Dolph Ziggler

** 4 **
Drew McIntyre

** 5 **
R-Truth

** 6 **
Chavo Guerrero

** 7 **
Kaval

** ALREADY ELIMINATED **
MVP (Week 6)

** NEXT WEEK ON NXT **

NXT ELIMINATION MATCH
Chavo Guerrero vs. R-Truth

Michelle McCool in action – if she wins, she earns her place in the Divas Championship match with Layla and Maryse (c) at the Elimination Chamber.​

 

[Mr. Book This Section]

Predictions

GRUDGE MATCH
John Cena vs. Randy Orton

SMACKDOWN ELIMINATION CHAMBER MATCH FOR THE WORLD CHAMPIONSHIP
CM Punk (c) vs. Big Show vs. Kofi Kingston vs. Jeff Hardy vs. Christian vs. The Undertaker

RAW ELIMINATION CHAMBER MATCH TO DETERMINE #1 CONTENDER FOR WWE CHAMPIONSHIP AT WRESTLEMANIA 27
Daniel Bryan vs. Kurt Angle vs. The Miz vs. Sheamus vs. Edge vs. ???

WWE CHAMPIONSHIP
Wade Barrett (c) vs. John Morrison
(Nexus barred from ringside)

UNITED STATES CHAMPIONSHIP
Justin Gabriel (c) vs. Ted DiBiase

DIVAS CHAMPIONSHIP
Maryse (c) vs. Layla vs. Michelle McCool (?)

 

[GCB]

Just had one match to finish on this SMACKDOWN so have done it. Hope you all enjoy and can remember what was happening ... GCB

FRIDAY NIGHT SMACKDOWN LIVE
BRADLEY CENTER, MILWAUKEE, WISCONSIN
FRIDAY FEBRUARY 11TH, 2011

*** DO YOU KNOW THE ENEMY? ***

*** PYRO ***
*** PYRO ***
*** PYRO ***
*** PYRO ***
*** PYRO ***

SMACKDOWN is back live and Mick Foley and Todd Grisham welcome the world to Milwaukee as they begin to hype up the main event for tonight – John Cena vs. an opponent from RAW chosen by Randy Orton. They remind us that Cena needs to beat Orton’s time of 14 minutes and 43 seconds from RAW this Monday after Orton was punished for his RKO to Michael Cole last week with a 10 minute penalty. If Cena can beat that time, he gets to choose the match type for their contest at the Elimination Chamber. Grisham and Foley also hype up the SMACKDOWN Elimination Chamber match – just nine days away now – which now has a complete line up following last week’s amazing SMACKDOWN show. CM Punk will be defending the World Championship against Big Show, Christian, Jeff Hardy, Kofi Kingston and The Undertaker after Christian and Undertaker qualified last week. Speaking of the World Champion ...

*** THIS FIRE BURNS ***
*** CM PUNK ***
World Heavyweight Champion​

A very mixed reaction for the World Champion as he heads out onto the stage smirking and proudly displaying his World Championship which is fastened around his waist – he kneels down and looks at his wrists before yelling out his infamous catchphrase “It’s Clobberin’ Time!” and heading for the ring. It seems like there are currently more cheers than boos after Punk’s actions last week on SMACKDOWN – Grisham introduce a replay to remind us of these ...

SINGLES MATCH – ELIMINATION CHAMBER QUALIFIER (If Christian wins, he qualifies. If Christian loses, he is fired)
CHRISTIAN vs. JOHN CENA

...

Cena steps back and he beckons for Christian to get to his feet as he waits and waits behind him, stalking his prey, ready to strike. The crowd are screaming for Christian to realise what is coming but he groggily gets up to his knees with no sign that he is aware that Cena is waiting to pounce ...

MICHAEL COLE:
This is it, Punk. The end of your new best friend, Christian is out of here in just a few ... Wait, where are you going?

CM PUNK:
Do you think I’m going to stay sat here all night, Cole?

Punk winks at Cole and then throws his headset at him before he slides into the ring, dropping the World Championship on the way, and stands up in front of Christian as he gets up. The referee orders Punk to get back out of the ring whilst Cena looks at him and prepares for a fight. However, Punk does the one thing that nobody expects him to do – as Christian gets up to his feet, Punk clotheslines him and knocks him back down to the mat as everybody in the arena stares stunned at what they’ve just seen. Cena looks confused towards Punk who shrugs his shoulders and winks at Cena, the referee has no choice ...

** THE REFEREE SIGNALS FOR THE BELL TO DISQUALIFY JOHN CENA! **​

WINNER:
CHRISTIAN (9:36) via disqualification

Punk leaves Christian and heads over to the ropes where he stands staring down at Cole and Cena who has exited the ring – he taps his head and laughs as it becomes clear what has happened here ...

TONY CHIMEL:
The winner of this match, as a result of a disqualification, and qualifying for the Elimination Chamber match ... CHRISTIAN!

Realising what CM Punk has just done, the WWE Universe cheer loudly whilst Cole and Cena look on in anger. Christian has qualified for the Elimination Chamber thanks to CM Punk! Cole looks stunned by this and he throws the headset down in temper before storming off around the ring and up the ramp. Cena looks on at Punk who now holds up the World Championship to mock Cena who shakes his head and begins to walk away. Punk laughs and then turns to Christian with the title still held high. Christian and Punk are speaking in the ring even though we can’t hear it. Clearly, Punk is telling him that he has gotten him a shot at the title, now he has chance to prove that he can win it. Christian nods his head and there is a look of respect between the pair of them as the camera follows them out of the ring ...

The camera returns to the World Champion who is now stood in the ring looking happy as he watches the titantron replays from last week. Grisham informs us that SMACKDOWN General Manager is reported to be extremely upset with Punk’s actions and has vowed to get even with the man from Chicago at the first opportunity he gets ...

CM PUNK:
Ladies and Gentlemen, tonight, I stand before you as a very happy man. As you just saw, last week on SMACKDOWN, I found a way to out-smart Michael Cole and Christian, a man who pushed me to the limit at the Royal Rumble and a man who has earned my respect, duly qualified for the Elimination Chamber. In nine days time, I defend this title ... (Punk unfastens the World Championship and holds it high) ... against Christian and four other men inside the demonic Elimination Chamber ...

A pop for Punk’s words, his words are appreciated tonight ...

CM PUNK:
There are many people who I’ve spoken to in the last week who, quite frankly, think I’m nuts. They think that I’ve lost my mind. I’ve been asked over and over – Why do you want Christian, a legitimate threat and a guy you struggled to overcome at the Rumble, why do you want him in the Chamber? Why are you so happy to be defending your title in such monstrous circumstances?

Punk looks around the arena, sure that many in attendance will be thinking the same questions, and he smiles ...

CM PUNK:
I’ve answered each and every one of these people in the same way – I am simply the ‘Best in the World’ and I am going to prove it in nine days time at the Elimination Chamber and then I prove it once and for all on the ‘Grandest Stage of them all’ at WrestleMania 27.

Cheers for this although some boos are mixed in still ...

CM PUNK:
So, when I face Christian in nine days, don’t expect an alliance between us. I don’t ... (Punk uses air quotes) ... “like” Christian but I do ... respect Christian. That won’t help in at the Chamber though, it will be his downfall, I will be determined to beat him and prove that his stubborn, courageous resilience at the Rumble was a one off, a fluke, something for me to overcome – and I will overcome it.

Just like that, Punk has switched back to being a heel and some boos follow ...

CM PUNK:
I will overcome Christian, I will overcome Kofi Kingston, I will overcome Big Show ...

Punk smirks before his next one ...

CM PUNK:
As I have done before, I will definitely overcome Jeff Hardy!

Heat for Punk here as the WWE Universe remember the circumstances around Hardy’s last exit from the WWE ...

CM PUNK:
And I know I will overcome the Deadman, the Phenom of the WWE ... I will overcome The Undertaker!

Pop for the mention of the legendary Taker ...

CM PUNK:
I will beat all five of them, respect or no respect, I will still be your World Champion, I will still be Michael Cole’s World Champion and I will go to WrestleMania 27 and face John Cena and I will prove to him and all of you that I am ... the ‘Best ... in the World’

The mixed reactions continue for Punk – the WWE Universe don’t know whether to cheer him or jeer him. As Punk looks serious after his big claims, the titantron flashes and here comes the man who Punk could be facing in two months time at WrestleMania 27 ...

*** MY TIME IS NOW ***
*** JOHN CENA ***
Royal Rumble 2011 Winner​

CM PUNK:
Oh great!

Punk looks annoyed as Cena, dressed in jean shorts and a custom black t-shirt declaring that nobody can see him, heads for the ring, waving his hand over his face to the WWE Universe as they give him grief. Cena slides into the ring and grabs a microphone before he waves a finger to signal for his music to be cut ...

CM PUNK:
Well, well, well, what a surprise! John Cena is out here, ladies and gentlemen!

JOHN CENA:
Quit trying to be funny, Punk, it ain’t working, man. I’ve been getting ready for my match later tonight backstage and I had no intention of coming out here tonight to speak to you or these idiots here in Milwaukee ...

Heat for Cena as he insults the Milwaukee crowd here ...

JOHN CENA:
... But then, Punk, then I heard you mouthing off as usual. You’re claiming to be the ... (Air quotes from Cena) ... “Best in the World” ... but the way I see it, Punk, you’re a long way from proving that. If you think that you’re just going to beat five other men in the Elimination Chamber and then walk into my WrestleMania main event and beat me, well, you’ve got a lot of confidence but it is all mis-placed.

Punk gives Cena a quizzical look and then leans back against the ropes, his hand waving across the ring, inviting him to continue taking the centre stage. Cena says a couple of words to Punk off microphone before continuing ...

JOHN CENA:
You see, Punk, it goes like this. I don’t think you’ll be the World Champion by WrestleMania. You have got to face five other men but if by some miracle, if by some way or means, you can retain that title in the Chamber, then you’ve got to face me at WrestleMania. (Punk shrugs his shoulders at Cena) And Punk, if that happens, you’ve got ... no chance.

CM PUNK:
Is that a fact?

JOHN CENA:
It is, Punk. You can’t beat me at WrestleMania. You wanna know why?

Punk smirks at Cena and mouths “Go ahead” to the Royal Rumble winner ...

JOHN CENA:
Because you’ve upset the wrong people, Punk. You claim that you don’t care what these people think of you, you claim that you don’t care what the locker room thinks of you, you claim that you don’t care what Michael Cole thinks of you. Last week, Punk, you interfered in my match with Christian and you deliberately went against the General Manager’s orders, you allowed Christian to qualify for the Elimination Chamber. Now tell me, Punk, how do you think Michael Cole feels about that?

Punk clearly doesn’t care a jot about what Cole thinks but Cena presses on with it ...

JOHN CENA:
Do you honestly believe that Michael Cole is going to allow you to retain that title, Punk?

Punk looks a little concerned over this comment but he shakes his head at Cena ready to speak when ...

*** JUST CLOSE YOUR EYES ***
*** CHRISTIAN ***​

Punk and Cena turn to face Christian as he heads out to the ring looking around the Bradley Arena for his Peeps – there are a lot of them here in Milwaukee tonight. As he steps up the ring steps, Christian has a smile on his face, he is clearly delighted that he is in the Elimination Chamber match for the World Championship a week on Sunday. The Canadian enters the ring and nods his head in the direction of CM Punk before scowling at Cena as he collects a microphone.

CHRISTIAN:
I couldn’t help but overhear your conversation, guys. I’m out here to tell you both that ... you’re right. CM Punk, you’re right. You’re nuts. You made sure that I got my place in the Elimination Chamber – even though I proved at the Royal Rumble that I am more than a match for you. And while I respect you for that, while I thank you for that, I think you’ve made a huge mistake. You see, you have the one thing in the world that I would do anything to get my hands on ... (Christian points to the title belt in Punk’s right hand) ... The World Heavyweight Championship. CM Punk, you are, as you said earlier ... nuts.

Punk shakes his head at Christian and chuckles to himself as Christian turns towards Cena with a glint in his eye ...

CHRISTIAN:
As for you, Cena. You’re right too. Much as I know CM Punk doesn’t like to hear it, he will not walk out of WrestleMania 27 as the World Champion. In fact, he won’t even walk into WrestleMania 27 as the World Heavyweight Champion ... I will. If I’ve always dreamed of holding the World Heavyweight Championship, my wildest dreams have been about holding the World Heavyweight Championship at WrestleMania. Cena, I cannot wait to face you one on one at ...

CM PUNK:
Hold it, hold it! (Punk doesn’t look impressed with Christian’s comments) Did I hear you right, Christian? You really believe that you’re going to win the World Heavyweight Championship in nine days time?

Christian nods his head as CM Punk looks him in the eyes.

CM PUNK:
Christian, you’re only in the World Championship match at the Chamber because of me. You’re only going to be in the Chamber because I want to prove to the world that I can beat you, 1, 2, 3! Christian, you will not be leaving the Elimination Chamber as World Champion. You will not be going to WrestleMania as the World Champion. Christian, I don’t like to be the one to break this to you but ... You will never ever be World Champion.

Christian’s look intensifies as he takes a step towards Punk, the World Champion stands face to face with him and tension fills the air as they stare into each other’s eyes ready to go right now. However, it doesn’t happen, Cena walks over and waves at the pair of them ...

JOHN CENA:
Boys, stop fighting! It isn’t worth it. It doesn’t matter whether it’s CM Punk or Christian who comes out of the Elimination Chamber with the World Heavyweight Championship. What matters is that when Elimination Chamber is over, I will have destroyed Randy Orton, I will head to WrestleMania and I will win the World Championship – whoever the champion is.

*** S.O.S ***
*** KOFI KINGSTON ***​

A huge pop for the Ghanaian, Kofi Kingston, as he bounds out onto the stage and all three men in the ring turn their attention towards him. Kingston jumps down onto the ramp and green and yellow pyro explodes behind him as he makes his way towards the ring and climbs the corner buckles to salute the fans quickly before grabbing a microphone of his own ...

KOFI KINGSTON:
Do you know what, guys? I think that all three of you are disrespecting me! (Kofi points to himself) It seems to me that the three of you seem to be forgetting that it isn’t just about you guys, there are four other people with a shot of leaving WrestleMania 27 as the World Champion. Now I don’t speak for Jeff Hardy, I don’t speak for The Undertaker and I definitely don’t speak for the Big Show but with all the talk about respect out here, I would have thought that you would have had more respect for the four of us.

Christian backs away from Punk a little more and kind of holds his hand up in apology to Kingston – it isn’t reciprocated by CM Punk or Cena however ...

KOFI KINGSTON:
In nine days time, God willing, I will give everything I have to find a way to win that World Championship and head to WrestleMania for the main event ...

*** CRANK IT UP ***
*** BIG SHOW ***​

Out strides Big Show, a look of determined rage in his eyes, he looks ready to cause some damage on SMACKDOWN tonight and beyond. As he heads for the ring, Kofi’s mood changes and he gets ready to protect himself if the need arises ... Big Show steps over the top rope but he only stares at Kingston. He reaches over and snatches the microphone from Christian before turning to address Kingston ...

BIG SHOW:
The time for talking is over, Kofi. Tonight, I am going to beat you so badly that you won’t make it to the Elimination Chamber match, Punk, Christian, I am going to destroy you inside the Chamber and then ... (Show turns towards Cena) ... well, Cena, let us just say I owe you a little bit, shall we? At the end of WrestleMania, the era of Big Show dominance will finally be here, the Giant will finally be on top.

Large boos for the words of Big Show as he starts to talk trash towards Kofi, Punk, Christian and Cena – all five men are getting in each other’s faces now and nobody is using their microphone now. As it threatens to turn ugly, the sound of the SMACKDOWN General Manager echoes through the arena ...

MICHAEL COLE:
That’s enough, that is enough. (Cole strides towards the ring wearing a suit and a blue tie and looking determined) ... This is how things begin when I don’t start SMACKDOWN with my usual address?

Boos for Michael Cole as he enters the ring shaking his head.

MICHAEL COLE:
As you’ve mentioned, once or twice, the Elimination Chamber pay per view is just nine days away now. Rightly, you’re all excited about your opportunities for the Chamber but you need to focus on tonight, you need to focus on SMACKDOWN because tonight we’ve got a number of high profile matches and you will all need to be on top of your game tonight. Yet again, I am out to prove that SMACKDOWN is the A-show here in the WWE and I have organised matches to prove this.

Cole looks full of self-importance as he stands central in the ring and looks around at all five men in the ring with a look of power in his eyes ...

MICHAEL COLE:
As I announced on RAW last Monday, I have made a match tonight between two of the participants in the Chamber already. Tonight, Kofi Kingston goes one on one ... with the Big Show. (Cheers from the WWE Universe) In addition to this, John Cena, well you have your match against a surprise opponent with the time of 14 minutes and 43 seconds to beat.

Cena asks whether Cole knows who is opponent will be but Cole shakes his head ...

MICHAEL COLE:
Sorry, John, no idea yet. (Cole turns away and faces Christian) Christian ... tonight, you will also go one on one with another of the Elimination Chamber participants ... (Christian glances sideways towards the World Champion, CM Punk) ... It will be Christian, one on one with ...

Cole pauses as he milks the announcement for a minute ...

MICHAEL COLE:
... with The Undertaker!

Huge cheers and astonishment around the arena – Christian vs. The Undertaker here on SMACKDOWN tonight! Christian looks a little shell-shocked at the idea that he will face the Deadman but he steels himself and nods his head ... Cole moves on and speaks to CM Punk next ...

CM PUNK:
Which, let me guess, leaves me against ... Hmmm, who could it be? Could it be ... Jeff Hardy?

Punk mocks Cole but the General Manager looks Punk dead in the eye and smirks. He then shakes his head ...

MICHAEL COLE:
CM Punk vs. Jeff Hardy? Really? I don’t think so! You see, Punk, I have other plans for Jeff Hardy tonight – he will team with his brother, the man he beat last week, Matt Hardy ... and they will challenge the British Empire for the Tag Team Championships!

Huge cheers from the WWE Universe as they love this announcement from Cole ...

MICHAEL COLE:
You, on the other hand, Punk. You disrespected me last week ... And you’re going to pay for it. (Punk glares at Cole as the crowd boo this comment) Tonight, Punk, you will go up against Team Angle ... That’s right!

Punk seems to be unconcerned over facing the WWE’s newest tag team despite their impressive victory over Triple H on RAW last week ...

MICHAEL COLE:
It will be World Champion CM Punk ... up against ... Percy Watson ... Joe Hennig ...

Pause from Cole as he thinks for a moment ...

MICHAEL COLE:
... And Kurt Angle!

Cole walks over towards the ropes before he stops and looks back ...

MICHAEL COLE:
And that match is next, Punk!

Punk looks outraged as he continues to glare at Cole – however, the SMACKDOWN General Manager is looking happy now that he has got revenge on CM Punk over last week. Cena smirks as he passes Punk and joins Cole as he heads back up the ramp out of the arena to a load of jeers and boos. In the ring, Punk, Kofi, Christian and Show look around at each other as SMACKDOWN heads into its first commercial break of the evening ...

*** COMMERCIAL BREAK ***​

SMACKDOWN returns with CM Punk now alone in the ring waiting for his opponents tonight. A quick replay of Cole announcing Punk’s match is played before the RAW trio begin to make their way down towards the ring ...

*** MEDAL ***
*** TEAM ANGLE ***
Kurt Angle, Joe Hennig & Percy Watson​

As Kurt Angle leads out his new team, Team Angle 2, towards the ring, Grisham and Foley update us on why the RAW team are here tonight – Cole has been planning this since Monday on RAW and he invited Angle, Hennig and Watson here tonight with revenge on Punk in mind after seeing what they did to Triple H. Red, white and blue pyro explodes as Kurt heads for the ring with the younger Hennig and Watson following behind, they head into the ring and prepare whilst staring towards a vulnerable looking Punk in the opposite corner. The referee signals for the bell and the Handicap Match is under way ...

1 vs. 3 HANDICAP MATCH
CM PUNK vs. KURT ANGLE, JOE HENNIG & PERCY WATSON

Punk hesitantly comes forwards to meet Team Angle who spread out, Kurt flanked by Hennig and Watson either side of him. Punk looks around at the three of them, waiting for the attack, paranoid over where it will come from – then it seems as if Punk decides to just go for it and he launches towards Angle and starts hammering away with forearms that stagger the Olympian backwards. However, Hennig and Watson are immediately on Punk’s back and they hammer away on him and drag him away from Angle instead. Punk makes space and then hits a high kick to the face of Hennig that staggers him before he whips Watson to the corner and follows in with a High Knee. The crowd are behind Punk here as he looks to Bulldog Watson down to the mat but Kurt Angle now prevents this as he attacks Punk from behind. Angle drags Punk away and then steps back and clotheslines the World Champion up and over the top rope to the floor outside. Team Angle mock the WWE Universe for a moment but then as Hennig and Watson come out for Punk, he suddenly lifts a steel chair from under the ring and rams Hennig hard in the gut with it before wheeling round and smashing it across the back of Percy Watson. The referee signals for the bell immediately and Punk smirks as he slides back into the ring towards Angle ...

** CM PUNK HAS BEEN DISQUALIFIED! **​

WINNER:
TEAM ANGLE (1:04) via disqualification

Punk advances on Kurt Angle who decides to haul his ass out of the ring rather than take a shot from Punk as well –Hennig and Watson stumble round to him and back away up the ramp with him. Tony Chimel announces the result to boos but Punk – now reunited with the World Championship belt – holds the steel chair and dares them to come back. As the camera focuses on Punk, he taps his head with his finger as if to tell everybody that he had out-thought Cole once more tonight. Team Angle leave the arena and CM Punk survives ... for now!

The camera switches back to the locker room where we see another one of the Elimination Chamber participants, Jeff Hardy, getting ready for his match tonight. Grisham and Foley remind us of his win over Matt Hardy last week and the chair shot from Matt that he took after the match was over. He has a look of anger on his face as he finishes lacing up his boots and then we see Matt Hardy behind him, warily approaching him ...

MATT HARDY:
Jeff?

Jeff freezes and then lifts his head up and slowly turns around to look at his brother who attacked him last week. His eyes narrow as he looks to Matt and waits for him to say something ...

MATT HARDY:
Jeff, I’m so sorry. I don’t know what ... I ... I don’t know why ... Jeff, I don’t ... Jeff, I’m sorry.

Jeff laughs out loud a little and shakes his head, the apology has clearly not worked for him ...

JEFF HARDY:
You’re sorry? You’re sorry, Matt? That makes it OK does it?

MATT HARDY:
Jeff, I don’t know why I did what I did. Watch the video back, Jeff, I regretted it the moment I had done it.

Jeff looks down, he is clearly disappointed in his older brother.

JEFF HARDY:
Matt, when I came back a few weeks ago, I told you why I was here. I was here to look out for you, I was here to team up with you and live our dream one more time. If I’d known the World Championship opportunity meant that much to you, Matt, you could have had it. All those damn words about living our dream ...

MATT HARDY:
I know, Jeff, I know. I can’t explain it. It just eats away at me inside. You’re my little brother, you’ve had the WWE Championship, I am just so desperate to be the World Champion, I’d do anything. I need you, Jeff, I need you to keep my mind focused on why I became a wrestler ...

Jeff shakes his head and slams down his t-shirt with a look of annoyance ...

JEFF HARDY:
Matt, I know it must kill you inside to have never won one of the big titles here, I know that. But that’s what it has become all about, Matt. You need to relax and enjoy wrestling for the WWE again, the title will come if you chill and you stop stressing out, man.

Matt looks down in embarrassment as the crowd remain quiet and watching intently at the titantron ...

MATT HARDY:
You’re right, Jeff, I know that. That’s why, tonight, it isn’t about winning the Tag Team Championships, it is about Matt and Jeff taking the WWE by storm one more time, about the Hardy Boys ruling SMACKDOWN one more night, it is all about showing Empire who the greatest Tag Team of all time are, man. I need you.

Jeff grimaces as he looks towards his brother ...

JEFF HARDY:
I know you do, Matt. I know.

Jeff reaches out and the Hardy Boys embrace, Jeff accepting the apology ...

MATT HARDY:
Now let’s get out there and kick those sorry British asses!

JEFF HARDY:
Let’d do it!

Reunited, the Hardys exit the locker room and head out into the backstage area as SMACKDOWN fades away into a break ...

*** COMMERCIAL BREAK ***​

SMACKDOWN returns and Tony Chimel announces that the following match is for the Tag Team Championships to a big pop in the arena. That pop continues as the music of the challengers roars into life in the arena ...

*** LOADED ***
*** HARDY BOYS ***
Jeff & Matt Hardy​

A huge pop from the crowd in attendance tonight as the ever popular Brothers Hardy appear on the stage – still a little bit of tension clearly in the air – and start to head towards the ring. Running down the ramp, both Hardys slide under the bottom rope and they leap up onto the corner ropes to salute the crowd as Grisham and Foley speculate over last week and how it will impact on their teamwork tonight. Foley suggests that it is all about Jeff – if he has truly forgiven Matt, there will be no trouble; on the other hand, if something is lingering, that could be a problem. In the ring, Matt holds out his fists towards Jeff looking for the fistpump but Jeff hesitates at first – it is clear that something is still lingering somewhere inside Jeff. However, he eventually does touch fists with Matt and they turn to await their opponents and the Tag Team Champions ...

*** RULE BRITANNIA ***
*** BRITISH EMPIRE ***
*** WILLIAM REGAL & MASON RYAN ***
(w/ Finlay) | Tag Team Champions​

With Finlay waving the Union Jack high and proud, the Empire walk out with the Tag Team Championship belts gleaming around their waists as they head towards the ring. However, there is a look of concern on the face of William Regal and the Empire don’t have their usual bravado as they approach the ring. Grisham introduces a video clip from SMACKDOWN a fortnight previous that shows the Hardy Boys victorious over the Empire in a non-title match and suggests this could be the reason for the concerned look of Regal. As they enter the ring, a ‘U.S.A’ chant from the crowd hardly helps Regal and Ryan to settle as they hand over the title belts to the referee, what a chance here for the Hardys to regain the Tag Team gold that they last held almost a decade ago.

TAG TEAM CHAMPIONSHIP MATCH
BRITISH EMPIRE (w/Finlay) (c) vs. HARDY BOYS

Much to the delight of the crowd, the Hardys start out the quicker and they catch the Empire off guard as they work perfectly as a team to isolate Regal and it’s like the clock has been rewound to a decade previous. Quick tags between Matt and Jeff hide the issues that they have had between them this week and Regal is being made to pay for it as a snarling Mason Ryan walks back and forth on the ring apron. Even Finlay is unable to catch the Hardys off guard as his leap onto the apron is met with a clothesline from Matt that knocks him down to the floor and onto his ass. Regal is desperate to get across the ring to make the tag but he is unable to do so until Ryan comes into the ring to break a pinfall attempt from Matt, draws the attention of Matt and the referee and allows Regal to regain his senses and then poke Matt Hardy in the eye to buy some time. As Hardy clutches his eye, Regal makes the tag and in comes the wrecking machine, Mason Ryan. He uses his power to bully Matt now and it is time for isolation of one of the Hardys instead.

And so begins the punishment for Matt. Ryan and Regal take turns to have a go with Matt, Regal hitting suplexes and stretches, Ryan hitting power moves that would weaken any WWE superstar. However, despite the beating, Matt isn’t for losing and they cannot find a way to keep him down on the mat for 3. A big boot from Mason Ryan fails when Matt gets his foot on the ropes; A Regal Stretch fails when Hardy manages to get to the ropes again. When Regal pulls out some brass knucks in desperation, Jeff Hardy comes in and knocks them out of his hands before pounding away at him instead. It appears to be the break the Hardys need until the referee ushers Jeff out and Mason Ryan comes in and drags Matt back to their corner and hits a powerslam to give Regal time to recover. With Matt struggling to make a comeback and struggling to make a tag, the crowd lose enthusiasm until Matt does find a way when he catches Regal with the Side Effect out of nowhere. With both men down, the crowd sense a real chance here and they encourage Matt as he slides across the ring towards Jeff’s outstretched hand. Mason Ryan illegally enters the ring at just the right moment though, he kicks at Matt and the referee gets in his path and shoos him away. Matt makes the tag to Jeff but the referee doesn’t see it and when Jeff comes in after Regal, he tells Jeff to leave the ring as well to the annoyance of the crowd. As Jeff protests, Regal grabs Matt and hits a German Suplex and holds for the pin ... 1 ... 2 ... No! Kick out from Matt! Regal manages to tag in Ryan though, the ref sees this one and we’re back to Matt being in trouble.

Mason drags Matt to his feet and drives a couple of right hands into him before whipping him towards the ropes. Going for a clothesline to the running Hardy, Ryan misses when Matt ducks it and continues into the ropes, Ryan swings again as he comes back but Hardy ducks under again, it looks as if Hardy will counter here. Right hands from Matt Hardy! Matt is fightin back as he comes over to the ropes again ... BAM! Finlay jabs the flagpole through the ropes and Matt’s momentum is stopped, the referee never saw it, Matt crumples over clutching his back where the flag hit him and drops to his knees in pain. An incensed Jeff Hardy rushes across the apron and dives off the ring towards Finlay, catching him with a forearm across the face as revenge. Jeff takes down Finlay but rolls into the announce table himself, a slight wince of pain from Jeff and he is slow to get back up. As he is down though, Matt reaches out for a tag but Jeff is not there. Matt looks around for his brother and sees him getting up off the floor and he shouts down to him, questioning Jeff’s position, as Ryan sneaks up behind him. Jeff tries to warn Matt but it is too late, Ryan spins him round, kicks him in the gut ... POWERBOMB! MASON RYAN CATCHES MATT HARDY WITH THE POWERBOMB! Mason Ryan makes the cover as Jeff tries to get into the ring to save Matt, however, Regal is there on the outside too and he grabs Jeff’s foot and prevents him making the save ...

** 1 **
** 2 **
** 3 **​

WINNER:
BRITISH EMPIRE (7:54) via pinfall

A frustrated Jeff pounds the mat in frustration and then turns to unleash a barrage of right hands to Regal who covers up and defends himself. Finlay sneaks up on Jeff and shoves him hard into the ring steps before grabbing the title belts and ushering Regal around the ring to the ramp where Mason Ryan meets them. Regal and Ryan lift the titles up high as the referee raises their hands, big title defence here for the Tag Team Champions as they defeat one of the greatest tag teams of all time. As the camera watches the Empire leave the ring, SMACKDOWN heads into a commercial by focusing on their delighted faces ...

*** COMMERCIAL BREAK ***​

 

[GCB]

(continued)​

SMACKDOWN returns with some replays of the aftermath of the last match between the British Empire and the Hardy Boys. As we see the Empire turn and leave the arena with their title belts safe, attention turns to the disappointed look on the face of Matt Hardy as he looks to his brother, Jeff. He asks him where he was and says he should have been there for the tag, Jeff tries to explain but Matt decides to leave without listening to him. Back to the present, the camera switches backstage where we see an angry Matt Hardy in the locker room, still sweating and breathing heavy, slamming things into his bag, a look of fury in his eyes. Matt Striker is the man who gets to him first ...

MATT STRIKER:
Matt ... Matt ... Quick word? What happened out there?

Hardy spins around, still looking angry, as he goes to answer in a loud voice ...

MATT HARDY:
What happened? Didn’t you see it? I took a hell of a beating, took it for the team, took it for the family – yet when I finally get chance to make a tag, my brother, my partner, he isn’t there! Why not? Where was Jeff? Huh?

Striker shrugs his shoulders but then Matt’s gaze turns towards the entrance to the locker room as Jeff walks into it and protests his innocence ...

JEFF HARDY:
Man, calm down, I was there for you, I just ...

MATT HARDY:
Save it, Jeff! I know what you’re going to say, you were going after Finlay, I know. (Jeff nods) Finlay wasn’t in the ring though was he? Finlay wasn’t our opponent, was he?

Jeff opens his mouth to argue back but again, Matt cuts him off ...

MATT HARDY:
You know, Jeff, I understand, I understand it clearly now. I know why you’re back here in the WWE, back here on SMACKDOWN ... It’s not for me, is it? You’re not back here to wrestle as the Hardy Boys no more, that’s obvious to me. All you’ve said of late about this being our dream, about this being what we’ve always wanted to do ... It’s all fake isn’t it?

Jeff looks horrified at the claims of his brother and again he tries to speak but is cut off ...

MATT HARDY:
You don’t care about me, you never have. You’ve got your place in the Elimination Chamber, you’re set for the chance to win the World Championship, what the hell do the Tag Team Championships matter to you? Nothing!

Matt raises his voice further as Jeff looks on stunned ...

MATT HARDY:
I’m here on SMACKDOWN, I have been for months now, fighting for a chance, giving it everything and getting nowhere. You coming back here, I thought it would be just like old times but ... No. It isn’t. You’re still the same Jeff Hardy, the egotistical, self centred Jeff Hardy ...

JEFF HARDY:
That’s just not true, Matt. I told you earlier, if the World Championship means that much to you, then you can ...

MATT HARDY:
Oh, give it a rest, Jeff. I know your priorities now, just go to the Chamber, do your thing and stop worrying about me.

Matt is silenced by the appearance of SMACKDOWN General Manager Michael Cole in the locker room.

JEFF HARDY:
Just what we need, what the hell do you want, Cole?

Michael Cole looks at Jeff with a incredulous look on his face ...

MICHAEL COLE:
I’m the General Manager of SMACKDOWN, Jeff, don’t forget that.

Jeff storms out of the locker room shaking his head, he is clearly frustrated over what is happening here tonight ... Meanwhile, Cole turns to Matt Hardy who looks at him with a glare. Cole smirks at Matt and then raises his hand and gives him the thumbs up. Matt looks confused for a second ...

MICHAEL COLE:
Good work, Matt. Like I said last week, this is a Matt Hardy I can work with ...

Cole spins around and leaves the locker room as Matt looks on frustrated still, the crowd not sounding impressed outside, his dream of being Tag Team Champion shattered here tonight. The camera returns to the ring where Grisham and Foley discuss the situation, Foley says that Matt needs to look back at the tape and re-think his words here tonight ...

*** REALEZA ***
*** ALBERTO DEL RIO ***
(w/ Ricardo Rodriguez) | Intercontinental Champion​

As Del Rio heads out to the ring, Rodriguez introducing him in Spanish, Grisham directs attention towards him and reminds us of the issues between Del Rio and his fellow Mexican, Rey Mysterio. Del Rio enters the ring and shakes his white scarf around before holding his Intercontinental Championship up for all to see before he turns to wait for his opponent tonight ...

*** RADIO ***
*** ZACK RYDER ***​

Long Island Iced Z himself comes out to a decent ovation, he is getting more and more over with the crowd who are sympathising with his plight of late after the betrayal of his former partner, Curt Hawkins, who, along with his new partner Jack Swagger, have made Ryder’s life hell over the last few weeks. With a Flip video recorder in his hand, Ryder heads to the ring greeting the fans enthusiastically before stepping into the ring, the red light on his camera showing that he is recording this live for his YouTube show. As Ryder salutes the fans though, Del Rio, not waiting for Ryder to stop filming, rushes over and attacks him, the referee signals for the bell and then removes the camera to the outside – maybe the footage will appear on YouTube later this week?

SINGLES MATCH
ALBERTO DEL RIO (w/Ricardo Rodriguez) vs. ZACK RYDER

To be honest, Ryder’s opportunities here are limited as he is fed to Del Rio – the Mexican making short work on the Long Island Iced Z who has work to do in the ring if he is to make it here in the WWE. Despite hitting the Broski Boot to Del Rio early on as he mounts a comeback from the early attack, he is unable to connect with the Rough Ryder and Del Rio makes him pay by dominating him for the rest of the match. Ryder makes one more comeback and again goes for the Rough Ryder but the Intercontinental Champion ducks it, catches Ryder off guard, rolls him over and locks in his feared submission hold – DEL RIO LOCKS IN THE CROSS ARM BREAKER! Ryder tries to fight but there is little doubt over what is going to happen here ...

** TAP **
** TAP **
** TAP **​

WINNER:
ALBERTO DEL RIO (3:54) via submission

The referee tells Del Rio to release Ryder but he refuses – for some reason, Del Rio has taken offence at Ryder! He keeps the Cross Arm Breaker locked on as Ryder taps out some more before finally releasing it when the referee threatens to reverse the result. As Del Rio steps back from Ryder, Curt Hawkins and Jack Swagger both roll into the ring and look to Del Rio with a grin on their faces. Del Rio stands in the corner and tells them to enjoy themselves ... Swagger grabs Ryder’s leg and here it comes ... ANKLE LOCK! SWAGGER HAS THE ANKLE LOCK ON RYDER! Zack writhes in pain, tapping some more, Hawkins goes to the top rope as Swagger continues to keep the hold locked on ... HEAT SEEKING ELBOW! HAWKINS DROPS THE ELBOW INTO RYDER’S BACK! The crowd are jeering as Swagger continues to keep the Ankle Lock on, he is trying to severely injure Ryder here and Hawkins goes to the top rope again ... Del Rio looks on with a smile as he lays a few boots to the head of Ryder, punishing him, taunting him over the fact he thought he could come out here and face him tonight as an equal. Suddenly, the rescue mission is here ...

*** BOOYAKA, BOOYAKA ... 619! ***
*** REY MYSTERIO ***​

The ‘Master of the 619’ comes flying out of the backstage area in his mask and runs down towards the ring where Hawkins, Swagger and Del Rio decide to take their leave and vanish from the ring. Mysterio slides under the bottom rope and consoles Ryder who is in pain still whilst he stares out towards Del Rio who is looking smug as he backs up the ramp with Ricardo carrying his Intercontinental Title belt. As Del Rio taunts Rey, Mysterio leaves Ryder for a moment and grabs a microphone.

REY MYSTERIO:
Keep running, Del Rio! That’s not a problem to me, no more, you see, I have some news for you. In nine days, at the Elimination Chamber, you are going to pay a heavy price, voy a tomar lo que es valioso para usted, I will take what is precious to you. You are going to face me for the Intercontinental Championship!

Upon hearing this news, Del Rio shakes his head in stunned disbelief, he clearly doesn’t want to defend the title against Rey but it appears he will have to! Ricardo tries to calm him down but to no avail, Mysterio, still knelt over Ryder, smirks as he looks out towards his rival. Grisham and Foley excitedly discuss the turn in events and Foley suggests that Mysterio is a real threat to the reign of Alberto Del Rio in nine days time as we head into another commercial ...

*** COMMERCIAL BREAK ***​

SMACKDOWN returns with Matt Striker stood in the interview pit looking slightly nervous as he waits ...

MATT STRIKER:
Ladies and Gentlemen, please welcome my guest at this time ... the BIG SHOW!

Boos echo around the arena as the World’s Largest Athlete comes into view, a look of contemplation on his face as he awaits Striker’s question ...

MATT STRIKER:
Show, earlier tonight, you told the world that you were planning to win the World Championship in nine days time. Tonight, you face Kofi Kingston, a man who many people believe you can’t beat ... Your thoughts?

Striker wilts as Show glares down at him, he is clearly annoyed with the question ... Show reaches over and takes the microphone aggressively before shoving Striker aside ...

BIG SHOW:
Kofi Kingston might have you fooled Striker, he might have all of these Milwaukee idiots fooled and he might have everybody at home fooled but, Kofi, you don’t fool me. I see it. I see the fear in your eyes every time you see me. Sure, you’ve got a couple of cheap, fluke wins over me but now I’m a changed man. I’m the Giant of the WWE, I’m the World’s Largest Athlete, I am over seven feet tall and I have the single most devastating right hand in the business. And you know I have, don’t you, Kofi? After all, I’ve been knocking you flat on your ass left, right and centre lately. Tonight, nine days from the Elimination Chamber, I am going to make an example of you, Kofi. I am going to leave you out cold in the middle of that ring to send a message to the rest of them. The Giant has awoken ... be afraid.

Show slings the microphone back into the chest of Striker, looks at him with disdain and then exits the interview area. The camera switches to the locker room where Kofi is stood watching Show’s words on a monitor. Josh Mathews is there to speak to him as there are cheers from the WWE Universe watching outside ...

JOSH MATHEWS:
You just heard the thoughts of Big Show, Kofi. What is your reaction to that?

Kofi looks thoughtful for a second before answering ...

KOFI KINGSTON:
Josh, there is no doubt about it, man, Show is a huge obstacle in my path to becoming the World Champion. His right hand, he’s right, it’s a stinger for sure, I’ve been on the receiving end of it several times of late. But, Show, you seem to forget that however many times you connect with that right hand, I keep getting back up. Show, have you noticed that you can’t keep me down? You can’t keep me down for 3 in the ring and you can’t keep me down outside the ring, I keep getting up and I keep coming back. (Quote marks signalled by Kofi, the quotes are popular tonight!) ... The Giant may have ‘awoke’ as you say, Show ... But don’t you forget that even giants can have ... Trouble in Paradise.

Cheesy end from Kingston as he walks away to prepare further whilst the camera returns to ringside ready for the battle between the two of them ...

*** CRANK IT UP ***
*** BIG SHOW ***​

As Big Show heads out looking menacing as usual, Grisham brings us some exciting news from Twitter and the account of the SMACKDOWN General Manager, Michael Cole. Next week, on SMACKDOWN, Cole has arranged for a Tag Team match between Curt Hawkins and Jack Swagger, they will face off against the team of Rey Mysterio and Zack Ryder. Foley agrees that that match will be interesting but then he suggests we have an even more interesting match to come right here, right now. Replays of Big Show being taunted on RAW by Kofi last Monday are shown before we see Show’s WMD Punch to Kofi that caused his defeat to Miz. As we return to the ring from the footage, Show looks ready to destroy Kofi here tonight ...

*** S.O.S ***
*** KOFI KINGSTON ***​

An excited Kofi Kingston heads out into the arena and the stage explodes in green and yellow. As he bounds down the ramp, Kofi looks pumped up and ready – after months of being so close to the World Championship, Grisham asks, can Kofi finally make that last jump to superstardom next Sunday in the Chamber? Foley says that Kingston is so close to it and that next Sunday could be his moment to shine – however, he has a huge barrier to overcome tonight first, Big Show has shown he isn’t to be messed with lately. As Kofi leaps up onto the ropes to salute the fans, Foley says he thinks Kofi is a future World Champion but he doesn’t see it happening next Sunday night while Show is in his path.

SINGLES MATCH
BIG SHOW vs. KOFI KINGSTON

These two have built quite the rivalry of late and go at each other immediately from the bell looking to get the advantage. The speed and agility of the Ghanaian mean that he is able to avoid the powerful right hands of Show and he launches a series of kicks and to the waist and thighs of the big man that stagger him back. Show manages to shove Kofi away as if he were swotting a fly and sends him clattering through the ropes to the outside with ease. The referee demands that Show stays in the ring but he heads out anyway and stalks after Kofi and grabs him by the back of the neck. Kofi is rammed shoulder first into the barricades as the ill feeling between the two of them begins to show. As the referee counts the pair of them out, Show climbs the steps and over the top rope to break the count. Kofi manages to re-enter at 7 and the match continues. Again, Kofi looks to hit a number of kicks and he manages to stagger Big Show again before he hits the ropes and leaps into a clothesline. A second clothesline follows as Kofi looks to take Show down, a third could do the trick ... No! Big Show shoulder blocks Kofi and he bounces off him and crashes down on the mat as Show looks down on him. As Kofi gets back up, Show grabs him by the throat and lifts him for the Choke Slam, Kofi manages to jump clear though and he bounces back up to connect with a drop kick to the mammoth chest of Show who drops to his knees. Kofi climbs to the top rope quickly, he leaps off as Show turns towards him, Diving Crossbody ... Show catches Kofi in mid-air and repositions him ... Fallaway Slam! Kofi bounces off the mat and out of the ring again as Grisham questions whether or not he can recover from this?

*** COMMERCIAL BREAK ***​

When SMACKDOWN returns, Big Show is now in complete charge of the match and he is dominating Kofi who is struggling. We have several minutes of this with Kingston trying to feed off the chants from the crowd but he is unable to get back into the match although Show cannot put him down once and for all. Things turn more serious when Show pulls down his strap and clenches up his fist after hitting a shoulder block to a countering Kofi, it appears to be time for the WMD. Show pulls back and waits as Kofi looks to be walking straight into it but at the last second, Kofi ducks it ... BAM! Show’s right hand crashes into the face of the referee instead and he is knocked completely cold to the dismay of the crowd who wince for the referee. Show looks down at the ref in anger at missing but then he is caught by Kofi who leaps onto his shoulders and begins pummelling away at his face, the crowd roaring him on. Show manages to shove Kofi down to the mat but he is shaken and this gives Kofi his chance. As Show staggers from his knee, Kofi spins around and looks to end the match but Show ducks the Trouble in Paradise, spins with a degree of agility, catches Kofi by the throat ... CHOKE SLAM! SHOW HITS THE CHOKE SLAM TO KOFI! As Show covers Kofi for the pin, another referee comes sprinting towards the ring down the ramp ready to make the count ...

** 1 **
** 2 **
** KOFI KICKS OUT! **​

The delay of the official obviously cost Show the win there and he looks agitated as he threatens the referee who has come down. A anguished cry from Show follows and he steps over the top rope and looks under the ring before tossing two steel chairs up and into the ring. The referee waves his arms as Show comes back in and looks set to waffle Kofi with one of them right now. Show is waiting for Kofi to get up, chair in his hands, ready to strike ... but the referee rescues Kofi and catches the chair and pulls it away from an unsuspecting Show as he raises it. Show looks furious now and he intimidates the official who looks scared for his life here. Show advances on the ref and forces him back to the corner before grabbing him by the throat with both his massive hands. Show lifts the referee up into the air and looks to set up a Military Press, threatening to throw the referee over the top rope and out of the ring. However, Kofi picks up the other steel chair and rescues the referee ... BAM! STEEL CHAIR TO THE BACK OF BIG SHOW! Kofi steps back and waits for Show to turn round before jamming the chair into his gut next. BAM! Show clutches his stomach and chest and falls to a knee as Kofi throws the chair away. The referee missed the shots from Kofi with the chair, Kofi waits ... TROUBLE IN PARADISE! KOFI CONNECTS! Kofi makes the cover ...

** 1 **
** 2 **
** 3 **​

WINNER:
KOFI KINGSTON (11:08) via pinfall

Kofi quickly rolls out of the ring with his hand raised – a wise decision as Show begins to furiously kick at the ropes and throws the chairs out of the ring towards the Ghanaian. However, the crowd are loving the way Kofi pulled that one out – a sneaky use of the chair to give Show a taste of his own medicine. The referee raises Kofi’s hand and then shakes himself off before heading to the first referee and checking on him. As Kingston smiles and turns to leave, Show’s eyes bulge in anger as he stares out after him and Grisham and Foley suggest that Kofi might have made a huge mistake tonight ...

The cameras switch backstage to Matt Striker who is stood waiting to interview Cryme Tyme, Shad Gaspart and JTG ...


MATT STRIKER:
Ladies and Gentlemen, please welcome JTG ... Shad ... CRYME TYME!

Decent pop for Cryme Tyme who returned from injury last week after the ‘alleged’ assault on them by the British Empire during the Royal Rumble PPV a couple of weeks ago ...

MATT STRIKER:
Guys, I gotta’ ask you ... At the Rumble, we saw you injured in the backstage area. Who was it who attacked you?

JTG and Shad both look at Striker with raised brows and laugh at him a little ... It is JTG who speaks up to answer ...

JTG:
Matt, whassup man? You saw the Rumble, you know what went down that night. The Empire boys, they don’t wanna fight wit’ us, they took the cowards way out, ain’t that right, Shad?

SHAD:
Yo, you know that’s right, Jay. Instead of facing us as part of the Turmoil match, they jumped us from behind and beat us down like dogs. Man, we worked hard for our spot in that match and they took it away from us just like that.

MATT STRIKER:
So guys, you confirm it was the Empire that attacked you?

JTG and Shad nod their heads with looks of annoyance as they think back to the Rumble ...

JTG:
Yo, it was definitely them, man. But they done made us boys mad now, dawg. They’re in big trouble now, we have our sights on their Tag Team titles and we won’t quit until we take them. Ya’ feel me, big man?

SHAD:
That’s right, Jay, we gonna’ chase down those British duh-ta-duhs and we gonna’ show them what happens when you mess with Cryme Tyme, when we get our chance, it’s gonna’ be off the hook ...

JTG:
Yo, Shad, you’re right. And Hart Dynasty, just so you guys know, we plan on winning those titles real soon. I know you guys got a beef with the Empire too but we can’t wait. If you get in our way, we gonna’ have to take you guys down too. We’ve warned you boys, yo yo.

JTG and Shad salute Striker before turning to leave and they exit the interview pit as SMACKDOWN heads into another break with the Tag Team division bubbling away nicely after JTG and Shad’s words for the Empire and the Dynasty ...

*** COMMERCIAL BREAK ***​

SMACKDOWN returns with a replay of Michael Cole making match announcements earlier tonight, specifically the one where he pitted two of the Chamber participants together – Christian and Undertaker. Grisham and Foley hype the match up as we prepare for it to begin here before also mentioning the other massive main event match here tonight on SMACKDOWN – John Cena against a mystery opponent from RAW as chosen by Randy Orton for the Beat the Clock challenge. The lights suddenly go off in the arena and a gong echoes throughout ...

*** GONG ***
*** GONG ***
*** GONG ***
*** GONG ***
*** GONG ***
*** GONG ***

*** GRAVEYARD SYMPHONY ***
*** THE UNDERTAKER ***​

The crowd here in Milwaukee go wild as the Phenom of the WWE, the Deadman himself, The Undertaker makes his way slowly out to the ring with eerie blue lights floating around in the darkness and balls of fire raising from the stage – one of the greatest WWE entrances of all time, if not the best. As ‘Taker makes his way towards the ring, Grisham and Foley discuss the chances of Undertaker in the Elimination Chamber in nine days time – Foley says people would be mad to bet against this man after what he has accomplished in his career. However, the fact he has been away for so long, could that work against him? Undertaker stands on the ring steps and raises the lights as Grisham introduces footage of Undertaker finally burying Kane alive last week to end their feud and qualify for the Chamber match ... In the ring, Taker removes his hat and coat and rolls his eyes as he looks around at the arena. Suddenly, the arena comes alive once more as the lights and music of another popular WWE superstar start up as well ...

*** JUST CLOSE YOUR EYES ***
*** CHRISTIAN ***​

Foley and Grisham discuss the dream of Christian to win the World Championship and Foley says he believes that, in nine days time, somehow, some way, Christian’s dream is going to come true. He says that despite the odds that he will have to overcome – the World Champion CM Punk, the Deadman, the World’s Largest Athlete, the Breakout Star of the WWE and the returning Jeff Hardy – he believes that this is Christian’s moment, his time to shine. As Christian enters the ring, he looks confident but respectful for Undertaker, his opponent tonight, who blankly stares at him. Christian jumps up the ropes to salute his crowd and survey his Peeps in the arena before he jumps down, removes his shirt and then stands opposite the Deadman waiting to start ...

SINGLES MATCH
CHRISTIAN vs. THE UNDERTAKER

These two have a good back and forth match where Christian is able to show that he belongs in such vaulted company as he takes the fight to Undertaker in the early stages. At one point, Christian has the Killswitch locked in but Undertaker is able to counter it with Snake Eyes instead and then a huge flying lariat clothesline to take control. A little while later, Christian is the one that manages to counter as Undertaker goes for Old School but Christian manages to yank Taker down from the top rope and over onto his back, a great defensive move. As Taker gets up, Christian goes for it again, can he get the Killswitch? No, Taker counters by shoving Christian away, Christian spins round ... CHOKE SLAM! UNDERTAKER WITH THE CHOKE SLAM! Taker makes the cover ...

** 1 **
** 2 **
** CHRISTIAN KICKS OUT! **​

As Taker looks out of the ring where Christian staggers towards the barricade, the referee advises him to stay in the ring but he clearly won’t be doing that. Taker steps back through the ropes and heads out after Christian, these two fan favourites now looking to take the action to each other on the outside, Taker catches up to Christian and hits a number of choke thrusts that hurt Christian a little more. Undertaker takes the wrist of Christian and looks back at the ring steps, he goes to whip Christian into them but it is reversed, to the delight of the Peeps in attendance, Taker crashes into the ring steps with a smash before falling over them, hurt. Christian has bought himself some time here and he slides back into the ring to recover as the referee begins to count Taker out. However, Christian has something to prove here, he climbs to the top rope and waits for Taker to step forward before he dives off and looks for a Plancha from the top rope, Taker dodges and shoves Christian on his way and he collides with nothing except the ground. Writhing in pain, Christian is down and out and Taker drags him up to take him back to the ring. He walks him back down the aisle and rolls him under the ring and the referee immediately checks on Christian to ensure his health is not in any danger. Bad move from the referee though, he takes his eyes of Undertaker for a moment ...

BAM!

Boos erupt around the arena as we see Big Show creep up on Taker unannounced and he smashes him hard in the side of the head, knocking him cold, before he edges around the ring with a look of fury on his face. The referee notices Undertaker out cold on the outside and looks puzzled but it becomes clear when he sees Big Show slide into the ring ... The ref protests against the presence of Show but then he shoves him aside and waits ... WEAPON OF MASS DESTRUCTION PUNCH TO CHRISTIAN AS WELL! The referee signals for the bell before getting out of the ring ...

WINNER:
NO CONTEST (7:36)

With Christian out cold, Show looks down on him with a semblance of a smile on his face. He uses his mammoth feet to roll Christian’s unconscious body out of the ring and then he demands to be handed a microphone. The crowd are booing Show for interrupting the match and Foley isn’t pleased either, he says he was looking forward to seeing how that match would finish. Show has a microphone now and he angrily begins to speak ...

BIG SHOW:
You know what? There’s been a lot of crap spoken about me lately, a lot of uneducated drivel from you fans, people saying that I’m a danger, a liability, that I should be kicked out of the WWE. I’ve knocked out a few people that you like to cheer for and you aren’t happy about it ...

Show takes a breath before continuing ...

BIG SHOW:
So when I come out here tonight and had my match with Kofi Kingston, what a shock it was that when he used a steel chair to beat me, none of you booed or complained then? You’re quick to judge me but it is OK for Kofi to do it, yeah?

Show wipes the sweat from his face ...

BIG SHOW:
The WWE Universe seems to think they can demand that I am kicked out of the WWE for knocking people out so I’m out here to make a complaint of my own. Michael Cole, I am not leaving this ring until you come out here and inform me of how Kofi Kingston is to be punished for his actions tonight ...

Show lowers the microphone as SMACKDOWN heads into a commercial with the Giant of the blue brand stood tall in the ring waiting for an answer from the General Manager ...

*** COMMERCIAL BREAK ***​

SMACKDOWN returns with Show still stood in the ring waiting and the WWE Universe booing him. He is mouthing off at some of the fans here in Milwaukee, he doesn’t seem to care about what they think of him right now. As Show waits, he begins to look annoyed again ...

BIG SHOW:
Where are you, Cole? I want an answer from you right now.

More jeers and boos as Show continues to hold up the show here tonight ...

???:
Can I have your attention please?

More boos echo around the arena as the SMACKDOWN General Manager appears on the titantron from his office. He looks annoyed with the fact that SMACKDOWN is being held up here tonight ...

MICHAEL COLE:
Big Show, what do you think you are doing? Get out of the ring, you are holding up MY show!

Heat for Cole for referring to SMACKDOWN as his show ...

BIG SHOW:
Cole, I want to know how Kofi will ...

MICHAEL COLE:
We don’t always get what we want, Show. On Monday night, John Cena and I wanted you to go out and destroy Randy Orton but you couldn’t do that could you? 4 minutes and 43 seconds? It’s a good job I was there to think fast and punish Orton further isn’t it?

Show looks a little annoyed ...

BIG SHOW:
Cole, I went out there and I did you and Cena a favour, I gave it ...

MICHAEL COLE:
You know what, Show? How’s about you cut the whining and get out of the ring now?

Show continues to refuse to leave but there are cheers in the arena now as behind Show, Taker is back up from being knocked out earlier. Show senses his presence and spins ... CHOKE SLAM! UNDERTAKER CHOKE SLAMS BIG SHOW! The crowd cheer Taker but then Christian also gets up on the ring apron. A quick look at Undertaker is followed by him heading to the top rope ... FROG SPLASH! CHRISTIAN HITS THE FROG SPLASH! The crowd love it and they cheer as Christian and Undertaker look across at each other, respect in their eyes but a burning desire, a desire to be the World Champion in nine days time at the Elimination Chamber. Grisham and Foley hype up the SMACKDOWN Chamber match once more before hyping up the main event to come ... John Cena has to defeat a mystery opponent from RAW in 14 minutes and 43 seconds in order to get to choose the stipulation for his upcoming match with Randy Orton at Elimination Chamber. Can he do it? Who will Orton send from RAW? Find out next!

*** COMMERCIAL BREAK ***​

 

[GCB]

(continued)​

SMACKDOWN returns and it is time for the main event and Cena’s opportunity to earn the right to choose the stipulation for his match with Orton in nine days time ...

*** MY TIME IS NOW ***
*** JOHN CENA ***
2011 Royal Rumble winner​

Huge boos greet the arrival of Cena, as usual, but he isn’t bothered as he heads out and waves his hand across his eyes before rushing down to the ring. When he arrives there, Cena looks at the WWE Universe with disdain before pointing to the WrestleMania 27 sign in the rafters and signalling the World Championship around his waist ... More boos for this. Cena grabs a microphone, he wants to know who he is facing tonight!

JOHN CENA:
Now I know all about the RAW roster, I know that none of the RAW (Air quotes) ... “superstars” ... have balls but I’m intrigued about which one of them thinks he can stop me tonight. You see, when I was on RAW, I beat every single one of them over and over, there is nobody on RAW that can beat me, not even Randy Orton.

Cena grins as he is booed again ...

JOHN CENA:
Now, I already know that whoever this guy is, he is a coward. If he wasn’t, he would have made himself known to Michael Cole or myself already ... Let me tell you something, there is no coward here in the WWE that can last 14 minutes plus with John Cena! That’s a fact!

The titantron sparks into life and we see a limo pull into the parking lot and a shiver of excitement spreads around the arena, which RAW superstar is here?

JOHN CENA:
Come on, you coward, get yourself out here right now!

The camera zooms on the back door of the limo which opens and the crowd wait ... out steps ...

A roar of approval from the WWE Universe as the Number 1 contender for Wade Barrett’s WWE Championship steps out of the limo and begins to make his way through the backstage area as Cena stares on in the ring, unsure of how to react here ...

*** AIN’T NO MAKE BELIEVE ***
*** JOHN MORRISON ***
Number 1 contender for the WWE Championship​

In slo-mo, Morrison begins to make his way towards the ring dressed in his sparkling trousers as well as his long coat, his shades covering his eyes, he salutes the crowd as fireworks explode behind him. Morrison makes his way down the ramp and slaps hands with several of the WWE Universe before turning his attention towards Cena in the ring. Handing his shades over to a fan, Morrison steps up the ring steps and removes his coat, he is expecting Cena to start out fast informs Foley, before stepping into the ring. As Foley predicted, Cena goes on the attack immediately as 14:43 appears on the titantron and begins to countdown as soon as the bell rings ...

SINGLES MATCH if Cena wins in less than 14:43, he chooses stipulations for his match with Orton at Elimination Chamber)
JOHN CENA vs. JOHN MORRISON

Cena jumps Morrison and starts pummelling away at him but the Number 1 contender for the WWE Championship manages to fight back and then goes on the attack himself. Forcing Cena into a retreat to the corner, Morrison slams into Cena over and over with forearms and, in the end, Cena decides to exit the ring to get away from the fired up Morrison. Standing outside the ring, Cena demands that the referee usher Morrison away and this eats up a large chunk of time as Cena slowly and carefully heads back into the ring. The pair of them now tie up instead and we are back to a wrestling match rather than an all out fight. However, neither man takes the advantage as they battle over the control of the early stages until Cena, after a frustrated peep up at the time on the titantron, surprises Morrison when he doesn’t break clean in the corner and resorts to slapping Morrison in the face.

11:53 REMAINING!​

Morrison rubs the side of his face in shock as Cena yells at him and demands that he lie down and take the pinfall like he knows he will do in the end. Morrison and Cena’s rivalry in this match heats up more and Morrison signals that he is going to be the WWE Champion next weekend which makes Cena laugh. Again, Cena goes for a slap to the face of his opponent but the young man is ready for it, he ducks under and then hooks his arms round Cena’s waist ... GERMAN SUPLEX! Morrison has Cena’s shoulders down ...

** 1 **
** 2 **
** CENA KICKS OUT! **​

Cena looks incredibly annoyed now and he hits a sly kick to the mid-section, or so the referee thinks, before grabbing the back of Morrison’s neck and ramming him head first into the turnbuckles. Morrison crashes into the corner awkwardly before Cena grabs his neck again and rams him up and down into the turnbuckle hard. The referee threatens to disqualify Cena and he is forced to relinquish the beating to Morrison for a moment. When Morrison staggers up, Cena is ready though and he begans to pick apart Morrison as the clock winds down further. It appears Cena is focused now as he dominates the match but he remains methodical not desperate ...

09:32 REMAINING!​

However, Morrison does not falter either, he is looking to prove that his earning of a Number 1 contender spot for the WWE Championship was no fluke and that he is a legitimate threat to Wade Barrett’s title in one week’s time at the Elimination Chamber. Despite Cena controlling the match, Morrison keeps countering and keeps Cena on his toes as we head into a commercial ...

*** COMMERCIAL BREAK ***​

As RAW returns, Cena and Morrison are back on the outside of the ring and Cena is looking up at the clock with increasing frequency now ...

06:12 REMAINING!​

Seeing that he has little over 6 minutes left, Cena grabs Morrison by the back of the neck and rolls him into the ring before following in. However, Morrison was playing a little possum there and he is able to stun Cena with a Roundhouse kick that floors Cena in the centre of the ring. As Cena groggily gets to his feet, Morrison sets for what appears to be a DDT but then somersaults forward and crashes Cena down on his back instead – Moonlight Drive! Is Cena finished here?

** 1 **
** 2 **
** CENA KICKS OUT! **​

A loud ‘Ooooh!’ goes up in the arena as Morrison goes close but he continues to take the advantage as he pummels Cena in the corner of the ring. He whips Cena across the ring and then follows up with a high knee in the corner that rattles Cena once more, dropkick to the back. Cena falls over the middle rope, he’d be perfect for a 619, but Morrison decides to springboard off the adjacent ropes, over the top rope where Cena is and drops a leg on the back of Cena’s neck. Cena snaps back into the ring clutching his throat and chest as Morrison scrambles back up to the top turnbuckle, time clicking away for Cena. Morrison surveys the situation from the top rope, waits for Cena to turn ... Missile Dropkick! Cena is down and out, Morrison makes the cover ...

** 1 **
** 2 **
** FOOT ON THE ROPES FROM CENA! **​

Desperation time for Cena, a foot on the ropes to prevent Morrison defeating him! Morrison steels himself and then waits for Cena to get up again ... Goes for the springboard Chuck Kick but Cena ducks it and takes a hike out of the ring to gather himself. A look to the clock shows that time is running out here for the Royal Rumble winner as he looks to earn the right to choose the match type when he faces Orton in just over a week’s time. The referee begins the count and, despite his irritation with the way time is ticking away, Cena stays out of the ring and frustrates Morrison a little.

** 8 **
** 9 **
** CENA BACK IN AT 9 – JUST IN TIME! **​

Morrison goes on the attack again as the clock displays just 3:37 remaining now, can Cena find a way back into this? Morrison regains control as he whips Cena to the ropes and hits a Tilt a Whirl DDT that crashes Cena down head first into the mat, is this it for Morrison?

** 1 **
** 2 **
** NO! CENA KICKS OUT WITH 3:05 REMAINING! **​

Another springboard from Morrison and this time he connects, CHUCK KICK! Cena is down and out in the corner and the crowd come alive as they realise that Cena is perfectly positioned here. Morrison holds the top ropes and looks out from the corner of the ring, a knowing look passes over his face, this is his chance! Up Morrison leaps, springboarding and twisting once more ... STARSHIP ... NO! Cena moves at the last second and Morrison eats the canvas, he fails to his Starship Pain and he writhes in pain on the mat. Cena rolls away and props himself up on the bottom rope in the opposite corner, trying to get his body working again, a look of desperation now in his eyes. With the clock down to 2:33, Cena staggers up and heads over towards the Number 1 contender for Wade Barrett’s WWE Championship. Cena hits a clothesline in the corner to Morrison and then catches him with a Sidewalk before a rather ambitious cover ...

** 1 **
** 2 **
** MORRISON KICKS OUT! **​

Morrison and Cena both get up quickly, Morrison swings wildly at Cena who ducks and hits the ropes. Shoulder Block! Boos echo around the arena as Cena hits a second Shoulder Block and then a third ... We know where this is leading! Morrison swings wildly again, Cena ducks and goes for the Protoplex but Morrison counters into an X-Factor! Huge cheers in the arena as Cena looks to have blown it ...

01:46 REMAINING!​

Morrison makes the cover ...

** 1 **
** 2 **
** CENA KICKS OUT! **​

A look of pure frustration is etched on Cena’s face now and the time is quickly running out, Orton is going to get to choose their Chamber match type! Cena gets to his feet, unsteadily, and charges towards Morrison and a slugfest begins as they trade heavy right hands. The crowd cheer for Morrison and boo Cena but this is a poor choice from Morrison and Cena’s superior strength wins out. Morrison throws a desperate right that Cena ducks under, he goes for the Protoplex again and this time he connects. Morrison is down on his back and Cena – who would normally go for the 5 Knuckle Shuffle now – tries to lock in the submission hold, the STFU! However, Morrison is able to scramble towards the ropes and he clutches them tight as the clock ticks down to less than a minute remaining! What can Cena do here? Morrison springboards off the ropes and hits another CHUCK KICK! The crowd love it now and Cena is down and out and seemingly finished for the night. Morrison leaps up to the ropes again, twists and turns ... STARSHIP PAIN! Morrison connects!

** 1 **
** 2 **
** CENA GETS A HAND ON THE ROPE AGAIN! **​

32 seconds left, Cena has just been hit with Starship Pain. Despite kicking out and showing guts, Cena can surely not recover from this? Morrison though is desperate to win and he scales the turnbuckles once more, he leaps off looking for a Missile Dropkick ... Cena moves at the last second and Morrison crashes down hard on his back. 20 seconds left! Cena comes off the ropes, no waving of the hands ... simply a FIVE KNUCKLE SHUFFLE! Cena is beckoning for Morrison to get up as the clock ticks away ...

00:12 REMAINING!​

... Up staggers Morrison, Cena lifts him to his shoulders, he has time to hit the FU and get the 3! Morrison desperately elbows Cena’s head and he drops him! The crowd roar as the clock ticks down ... down ... Morrison goes for a Roundhouse Kick but misses, Cena lifts Morrison up once more ... FU! CENA HITS THE FU ATTITUDE ADJUSTMENT! Morrison crashes down on his back but Cena looks at the clock ...

00:03

00:02

00:01

00:00​

Cena looks up at the titantron in dismay as the clock ticks down and reaches 00:00, the FU was too late for him to recover and react with the pinfall. He stares around in shock, Randy Orton will get to choose the stipulation for Cena’s match at Elimination Chamber with the Viper! Cena looks like he cannot believe what has happened and he clutches his head with his hands as he looks back up at the titantron where 00:00 remains stubbornly in place. Cena angrily kicks the ropes in frustration ... but then John Morrison surprises him and rolls him up for a pinfall ... The match is still going ...

** 1 **
** 2 **
** 3 **​

WINNER:
JOHN MORRISON (15:04) via pinfall

Worse for wear, Morrison retreats to the corner, staggering but victorious, the cheers of the crowd ringing through the arena as he holds his arm up high – what a huge victory for Morrison! The Number 1 contender for the WWE Championship pulls out a win over the man who could well be the World Champion inside the next two months! However, Cena is not amused and he rushes Morrison, who doesn’t see it coming, and he smashes him hard in face. Cena has lost it and is pummelling the life out of Morrison over and over and over ... Morrison covers up as the referee tries to calm Cena down but Cena isn’t going to be calmed. He drags Morrison out of the corner and then lifts him onto his shoulders once more ... FU! CENA HITS THE FU TO MORRISON! Boos ring out around the arena as Cena cements his status as a bad loser, he looks angry over what has happened. Cena drops out of the ring and grabs a table from under the ring, what is he doing now? Cena sets the table up in the ring and then he looks towards Morrison who is starting to crawl to his knees ...

*** WE ARE ONE ***
*** NEXUS ***
Ezekiel Jackson, David Otunga, Skip Sheffield & Heath Slater​

What on earth are these guys doing here?

Cena looks up and sees them coming, confused for a moment, but then he looks to Morrison and a look of realisation spreads across his face. John Morrison is facing the Nexus leader at the Elimination Chamber, that’s why they’re here! Cena stands back and waits for Nexus to enter the ring thinking they’re here to attack Morrison. Cena drags up Morrison and shoves him towards the Nexus who catch Morrison and then allow him to stumble clear before Skip Sheffield suddenly rushes Cena ... CLOTHESLINE! Cena is caught completely off guard as Nexus appear to be assisting John Morrison here for some reason. As Cena rolls out of the ring looking confused, Grisham speculates that Nexus are here to protect Morrison after they left Wade Barrett on Monday Night RAW this week ... Cena staggers up the ramp looking bewildered as SMACKDOWN ends with Nexus raising Morrison’s hand in victory tonight. Morrison eyes them suspiciously and then drags him arm away from them which causes Nexus to step back. Cena is still on stage and looks on in disbelief that he failed to defeat Morrison here tonight. Randy Orton gets to make the decision over their Elimination Chamber match! What will the Viper decide now on RAW this Monday night?

*** END OF SHOW ***

=========================================

ELIMINATION CHAMBER 2011
*** CONFIRMED MATCHES ***

GRUDGE MATCH
(Orton to choose match stipulation)
John Cena vs. Randy Orton

SMACKDOWN ELIMINATION CHAMBER MATCH FOR THE WORLD CHAMPIONSHIP
CM Punk (c) vs. Big Show vs. Kofi Kingston vs. Jeff Hardy vs. Christian vs. The Undertaker

RAW ELIMINATION CHAMBER MATCH TO DETERMINE #1 CONTENDER FOR WWE CHAMPIONSHIP AT WRESTLEMANIA 27
Daniel Bryan vs. Kurt Angle vs. The Miz vs. Sheamus vs. Edge vs. ???

WWE CHAMPIONSHIP
Wade Barrett (c) vs. John Morrison
(Nexus barred from ringside)

UNITED STATES CHAMPIONSHIP
Justin Gabriel (c) vs. Ted DiBiase

INTERCONTINENTAL CHAMPIONSHIP
Alberto Del Rio (c) vs. Rey Mysterio

DIVAS CHAMPIONSHIP
Maryse (c) vs. Layla vs. Michelle McCool (?)

*** SUNDAY 20TH FEBRUARY LIVE AND EXCLUSIVE ON PAY PER VIEW ***

*** 9 DAYS AWAY ***​

​